JP6657804B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, and game ball arranging a plurality of ball entrance capable ball entrance port, when the game ball to the ball entrance opening has ball entrance, imparting game value on Yu technique's A gaming machine configured as described above is known.

JP 2010-269071 A

However, in such a gaming machine, further cost reduction has been required .
The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing costs.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first area in which a game ball can enter, a second area arranged in parallel with the first area, and a first area. A first assigning unit capable of assigning a first game value based on a game ball having entered the first game value, and a first game unit having a first game value based on a game ball having entered the second area; A second assigning means capable of assigning a second game value different from the value, a projecting portion formed to project between the first region and the second region, and from above the projecting portion. A flow path forming member capable of forming a guide flow path by being arranged facing each other with a width that allows the game balls to flow so that the game balls can flow down to the protruding portion, and to a position outside the first region. A first wall formed in connection with the protruding portion for restricting a game ball from rolling, and a game out of the second region; A second wall portion formed in connection with the protruding portion for restricting rolling of the first region, and a payout means capable of paying out a game ball to a player, wherein the first region is provided. The first number of game balls are paid out as the first game value by the payout means based on that the game ball has entered the game ball, and based on the game ball having entered the second area. A second number of game balls greater than the first number is paid out as the second game value by the payout means, and the second number of game balls is disposed on the first area side and is closest to the protrusion. A first space between the flow path forming member and the protrusion, and a distance between the flow path forming member disposed on the second region side and closest to the protrusion, and the protrusion The second intervals are adjusted respectively, so that they flow down the guide channel. The ratio at which the ball enters the first region and the ratio at which the ball enters the second region are configured to be respectively variable, and the ratio at which the ball enters the first region is adjusted to be high. The ratio of entering the second region is reduced, and the ratio of entering the second region is adjusted to be high, so that the ratio of entering the first region is reduced. A position of the flow path forming member arranged on the first area side and closest to the protrusion; and a position of the flow path forming member arranged on the second area side and closest to the protrusion. the state, and are not each player is concealment constructed, the number of gaming balls which have entered the special first region, the predetermined total number of the number of gaming balls which have entered the special second region Based on the first area, until the total reaches the predetermined number, The number of game balls entered and the number of game balls entered in the second area can be displayed. The number of game balls entered in the first area and the number of game balls entered in the second area are displayed. Ru der that the number of ball entrance to the game ball is configured to be set so as not to appear to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a first area in which a game ball can enter, a second area arranged in parallel with the first area, and a game ball in the first area A first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on the first game value, and a first assigning means different from the first game value based on a game ball entering the second area. A second providing means capable of providing a game value of 2, a protruding portion formed between the first region and the second region, and a game ball protruding from above the protruding portion. A flow path forming member capable of forming a guide flow path by being disposed facing each other with a width that allows a game ball to pass therethrough so that the game ball can flow down, and the game ball rolling out of the first region. A first wall formed in connection with the protrusion for restricting the game ball from rolling out of the second region; A second wall portion formed by being connected to the projecting portion to control the game ball, and a payout means capable of paying out a game ball to a player, wherein the game ball enters the first region. The first number of game balls is paid out as the first game value by the payout means, and the first number of game balls is paid based on that the game balls enter the second area. A larger number of second game balls are paid out as the second game value by the payout means, and the flow path forming member arranged on the first area side and closest to the projecting portion; A first distance between the protrusion and the second distance between the flow path forming member disposed on the second region side and closest to the protrusion, and the protrusion, respectively. By being adjusted, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path is placed in the first area. The ratio of entering the first region and the ratio of entering the second region are configured to be variable, and the ratio of entering the first region is adjusted to be high, thereby entering the second region. The ratio is reduced, and the ratio of entering the second region is adjusted to be high, so that the ratio of entering the first region is configured to be low. The player visually recognizes the position of the flow path forming member that is disposed and is closest to the protrusion, and the position of the flow path forming member that is disposed on the second area side and is closest to the protrusion. all SANYO being difficult construction, the the number of gaming balls which have entered the special first region, based on the sum of the number of gaming balls which have entered the special second region has reached a predetermined number , The number of game balls that have entered the first area until the total reaches the predetermined number And the number of game balls that have entered the second area, and the number of game balls that have entered the first area and the number of game balls that have entered the second area. Doo is Ru der those capable of setting so that it does not appear to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the inside of the sorting winning device in the first embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the sorting ball opening in the first embodiment, and (c) is the second view. It is a perspective view of a rotating body in one embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen in the first embodiment. . FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an overview of various counters and a reserved ball storage area according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating contents of a RAM in a main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the content of ROM in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment and the correspondence of the big hit determination value of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in 1st Embodiment, and (d). FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and a hit value of a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the relationship, and FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of departure (normal) in the first embodiment; (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probable variation) in the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special symbol 2 change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a gate control process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st execution form. It is a flow chart which showed winning detection processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning detection end processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the continuous prize performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of a certain change winning prize performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view inside the distribution prize winning device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen showing a continuation chance in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and (b) is a display screen showing a probability change chance in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen showing continuation determination in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and (b) is a display screen showing probability change determination in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated. (A) is a front view inside the distribution winning a prize device in the modification of the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view inside the distribution prize winning device in the modification of the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a front sectional view of a distribution winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an upper surface sectional drawing of the distribution prize winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device in the second embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device of a La-La cross section in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a first cross section of the third embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning device in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the second embodiment, and (c) is a winning opening and payout ball in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with number typically. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation | variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen in a 3rd embodiment. . It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram of the display mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a RAM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation execution determination processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit setting processing 3 which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop type reception processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed continuation display judging processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance symbol setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the increase-time holding symbol setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance symbol setting process at the time of the reduction performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in a 4th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an electric utility release pattern in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition transition of the game state in 4th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 selection table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view of the special figure 2 selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetching process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating start-up processing 4 executed by an MPU in a main control device according to a fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting processing 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition transition of the game state in 5th Embodiment typically. FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically illustrating an electrical configuration according to a fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a special figure 1 type selection table, and (b) is a schematic view of a special figure 2 type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol 2 change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special design 1 change start processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of a first random number table in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a first type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a second random number table. (D) is a schematic diagram of a first small hit type selection table. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit prize winning processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit setting process at the time of V passage performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit prize completion processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a time saving number selection table in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process at the time of a win performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a partially enlarged view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the distribution winning prize apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transition transition of the game state in 8th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram of a 1st hit random number table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of a 1st hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 1 in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 2. It is a schematic diagram of the selection 2 table for special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. It is a front view showing a game board of a modification in an 8th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in a modification.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning ports 63 and 64, a distribution winning device 650 having a probable rotating body 900 and a continuous rotating body 901 and the like can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 12 from the back side. Attached to. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used, for example, to input game information on a game information input screen displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, to change the stage of the effect, and to effect super reach. It is operated by the player when the content is changed or the like.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with a ball (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, which will be described later, are adjusted according to the theme given to each stage. Designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. For example, every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “the city stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” → .... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes" or a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Will be As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the sorting winning device 650, the variable winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. Can be The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the normal winning opening 67, the variable winning device 165, the variable display device unit 80, and the sorting winning device 650 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is provided in the through hole, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a special symbol 1 (one of the first symbols) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b. , A special symbol 2 (one of the first symbols) is drawn. A lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and when the ball passes through a through gate (normal entrance) 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In the jackpot game, a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpots are executed. In the present embodiment, a jackpot of at least 8 rounds is guaranteed, and if a player wins a continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901 during the 8 rounds, a jackpot game of 8 rounds is added, and a jackpot game of a total of 16 rounds is played. Granted to the person.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first round is configured to have a maximum of 15 seconds from the first round to the eighth round, and the total number of game balls that have passed 15 seconds or won in the second specific entrance 650a is 5 seconds. The sorting prize winning device 650 is set in an open state until the ball reaches the ball. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between rounds is set to 5 seconds. Here, the positive variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotary body 901 arranged in the distribution prize winning device 650 are both rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds. The game ball that is rotated while being held by the body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 can be in a state of being ejected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being held by the probable variable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 across the rounds.

  In the present embodiment, the distribution prize winning device 650 is set to be open from the first round to the eighth round, and the variable prize winning device 165 is set to be open from the ninth round to the 16th round. Until 15 seconds elapse from the start of one round, the sorting prize winning device 650 is set to the open state, and the variable prize winning device 165 is set to the closed state, and until 15 seconds to 30 seconds elapse from the start of the first round. , The distribution prize device 650 may be set to a closed state, and the variable prize device 165 may be set to an open state.

  With such a configuration, the period during which the game ball wins in the distribution winning device 650 and the period during which the game ball enters the variable winning device 165 can be divided, and the winning device that the player wins can be divided. You can choose to play the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening width of the second specific entrance 650a of the variable distribution winning device 1650 is smaller than the opening width of the specific entrance 165a of the variable winning device 165, so that it is difficult for game balls to enter. It is configured. As a result, the time required to complete the jackpot game increases, but after 15 seconds, the variable prize device 165 in which the game ball can easily enter is opened, so that the time required to complete the jackpot game can be reduced.

  In addition, although the setting is made so as to switch the prize winning device which is opened from the start of one round to 15 seconds and thereafter, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the prize device may be set to be switched every 3 seconds. It may be configured to set at a cycle other than the above. In addition, although the release cycle is the same in all rounds, the present invention is not limited to this, and the release cycle (timing) may be changed for each round.

  Further, it may be configured to switch to the opening of the variable winning device 165 based on the ball entering the continuation opening 901a, or may be configured to enter the continuation opening 901a to be described later when entering the continuation opening 901a. If not, the opening of the distribution prize device 650 may be continued, and the opening of the variable prize device 165 may be switched only when a game ball has already entered the probability change opening 900a.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not it is an ordinary symbol hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. become. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As the special symbol jackpot type, one jackpot type “big hit A” is set (see FIG. 9C). As described above, the jackpot type of “jackpot A” is configured so that a jackpot game of at least 8 rounds and a jackpot game of up to 16 rounds can be executed. In this embodiment, when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 has a big hit, the start of the "big hit A" is always determined. Then, at the jackpot A, the distribution winning device 650 is opened from the first round to the eighth round. In the 8 round jackpot game, when a game ball enters the continuation opening 901a, the game ball is detected by a continuation switch (not shown), and a 9 to 16 round jackpot game is awarded. The device 165 is opened.

  From the first round to the eighth round, the slide member 670 of the sorting prize winning device 650 is slid toward the back side of the game board 13 so that the game ball can enter the second specific entrance 650a. Is set. This open state is set to the closed state when five game balls enter the second specific entrance 650a, or when the open state continues for 15 seconds, and the one-round jackpot game is ended. From the first round to the eighth round, the interval time between rounds is set to 5 seconds.

  From the ninth round to the 16th round, the opening and closing door of the variable winning device 165 is rotated to the front side to be in an open state, and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the opening and closing door, and the specific entering ball is received. The game ball is guided to the inside of the mouth 165a. Here, when the variable winning device 165 is in the open state, 10 game balls enter the specific entrance 165a, or when the open state has elapsed for 30 seconds, the opening / closing door is turned upright and closed. Set to state. The interval time between the ninth round and the 16th round is set to 3 seconds. As a result, the time between rounds from the ninth round to the 16th round is shorter than that from the first round to the eighth round. Further, since the opening width of the specific entrance 165a is set larger in the variable winning device 165 than in the sorting winning device 650, the game ball can easily enter and the digestion time of one round can be shortened. it can. The size of the specific entrance 650a of the sorting prize winning device 650 is set to a size that allows one game ball to enter, as shown in FIG. Has become.

  The details of the distribution prize device 650 arranged on the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 3A to 3C are diagrams for explaining the details of the distribution prize winning device 650. The sorting prize winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into an opening formed by a router. The sorting prize winning device 650 has the same outer shape as the base plate 651 from the front side of the base plate 651, and a front cover in which an area in which a game ball can flow down is formed by fitting with the base plate 651. And a body 652.

  FIG. 3A is a front view of the distribution winning device 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. In the upper portion of the base plate 651, a specific ball entrance 650a, which is an opening through which one game ball can enter, protrudes toward the front side. Above the specific entrance 650a, a slide member 670 that changes between a state in which game balls can enter the specific entrance 650a and a state in which it cannot enter is slid in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. It is arranged as possible. The slide member 670 is connected to a solenoid disposed on the rear side of the base plate 651 by a connection member. In a non-operating state in which the solenoid is not excited, the slide member 670 is projected to the front side of the game board to specify the slide member 670. The game ball is set so as to prevent the game ball from entering the entrance 650a. When the solenoid is energized and operated, the slide member 670 is moved to the back side of the game board 13 by the connecting member, and the specific entrance 650a is set in an open state.

  A flow path through which a game ball having entered the specific entrance 650a can flow is formed by a flow path wall 653 protruding toward the front side. The flow path wall 653 is formed with a width (15 mm in the present embodiment) that allows one game ball (diameter 11 mm) to flow down, and forms a flow path directly below the distribution ball opening 650a. Thereafter, a flow path is formed that branches the flowing game ball into the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655. A magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the sorting ball inlet 650a to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 650a. No wall is formed on the surface facing the branch point of the flow path, and the rotational distribution member 800 is disposed. The rotation distributing member 800 is configured to have the same width as the protruding width of the flow path wall portion 653, and has a shaft portion 800a that is rotatably fixed to the base plate 651. On the back side of the base plate 651, a distribution motor 270a, which is a motor for rotating the rotation distribution member 800, is provided.

  The rotation of the distribution motor 270a is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 rotates the rotation distributing member 800 rightward by 30 degrees (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3A) and rotates leftward by 30 degrees ( (The position shown by the dotted line in FIG. 3A), the distribution motor 270a is driven and rotated every 5 seconds. That is, the state in which the game balls are distributed to the left flow path 654 and the state in which the game balls are distributed to the right flow path 655 are switched every 5 seconds. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 turns on the pachinko machine 10 and executes a gate control process (S1104) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later, so that the left and right directions are changed every 5 seconds. The drive of the distribution motor 270a is controlled so that the rotation distribution member 800 is repeatedly rotated. As will be described in detail later, the gate time counter 203k of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to be backed up even when the power is turned off. The counting is restarted from the state described above, and the rotation of the rotation distribution member 800 is executed.

  Therefore, the rotation distribution member 800 is not driven at the same timing every time from when the power is turned on, but can be made different depending on the state at the time of power failure. Therefore, even when the power is turned on all at once for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the operation timing of the rotation distribution member 800 can be made different.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation cycle of the rotation distributing member 800 is set to a constant value of 5 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be changed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the drive cycle from being synchronized with another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to provide different gaming properties by selecting the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the left flow path port 654a, which is the lower end of the left flow path, a continuous rotating body 901 is rotatably supported with respect to the base body 651. The continuous rotating body 901 is rotated leftward by a first rotating motor 270b disposed on the rear side of the base body 651 at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation. In addition, at the right flow path opening 655a, which is the lower end of the right flow path 655, a positive variable rotating body 900 is rotatably supported by the base body 651. The positive rotating body 900 is rotated rightward by a second rotation motor 270c disposed on the back side of the base body 651 at a rotation speed of one rotation every five seconds. It is to be noted that the probable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 have the same shape.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3 (c), the shapes of the probable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 will be described. FIG. 3C is a perspective view of the positive variable rotating body 900 (continuous rotating body 901). The probable rotating body 900 has a circular outer shape and a thickness of one game ball. Around the periphery, recesses in which game balls can enter are formed at four places, up, down, left, and right. The recess provided on the periphery includes one probable opening 900a and three rotating entrances 900b to 900d. The probable changing port 900a is configured to be able to guide game balls to the rear side of the probable rotating body 900 so that game balls can be guided to the probable changing channel opening 901k provided in the base plate 651. In addition, a wall that prevents the game ball from being guided to the positively-variable channel opening 901k is disposed on the rear side of each of the rotary entrances 900b to 900d. Further, the continuous rotating body 901 has the same configuration as that of the variable probability rotating body 900, and in the continuous rotating body 901, the variable probability opening 900a is formed as the continuous opening 901a.

  In a state where the positive variable rotator 900 is rotated to a position where the opening of the positive variable port 900a faces the right channel port 655a, a game ball flowing down the right channel 655 can enter the positive variable port 900a. The probability variable rotator 900 is constantly rotated rightward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation, and when a game ball enters the probability variation mouth 900a while rotating, the game ball is held in the probability variation mouth 900a. When the probable opening 900a is turned downward (the position shown in FIG. 3A), the game balls in the probable opening 900a flow down to the probable flow passage 900k. The game ball that has flowed into the certain-variable channel opening 900k is detected by a not-shown certain-variable switch (magnetic sensor) arranged on the back side of the game board 13. When a game ball is detected by the probability change switch, a probability change flag 203p to be described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and 100 is set to the probability change counter 203g at the end of the big hit game (ending timing). In the period until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the jackpot game, a high-probability game state in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability (probable change game state) is set.

  Also, when a game ball flowing down the right channel 655 enters one of the rotation entrances 900b to 900d of the positive variable rotating body 900, the positive variable rotating body 900 rotates leftward and the positive variable channel opening 900k , The game ball cannot flow down to the variable flow passage opening 900k due to the rear side wall portion of the rotation entrance 900b, and the game ball within the rotation entrance 900b from the rotation entrance 900b flows to the discharge passage 656. Discharge. The game balls discharged to the discharge flow path 656 flow down the discharge flow path 656 and are discharged from the discharge port 657 formed at the lower end portion of the discharge flow path 656 to the back side of the game board 13, and the game balls 13 The pachinko machine 10 is discharged to the outside (island facility side) by a flow path (not shown) arranged on the back side.

  As described above, the positive rotation body 900 is always rotated at a speed of one rotation in 5 seconds, and the distribution member 800 is also rotated every 5 seconds to switch the direction of distribution. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot game, an opportunity for a game ball to enter the probable change entrance 900k is set once in one round, thereby increasing the degree of expectation of the player for the probable change game. Can be. Therefore, even during the jackpot game executed when the special symbol hits, it is possible to be interested in whether or not the probable change game is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot. is there.

  The continuous rotating body 901 is constantly rotated leftward at a rotation speed of 5 seconds per rotation. Therefore, similarly to the probable rotating body 900, when a game ball flowing down the left flow path 654 enters the continuation port 901a, the game ball is rotated leftward while holding the game ball in the continuation port 901a, The game ball inside the continuation port 901a is caused to flow down to the continuation flow path 901k at a position facing the 901k. The game balls flowing into the continuous old flow path 901k flow down to the back side of the game board 13 and are detected by a continuation switch (magnetic sensor) (not shown) and then to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (island facility side). Is discharged.

  Here, when a game ball is detected by the continuation switch, a round start flag 203m described later is set to ON by the MPU 201 of the main control device 113. If the round start flag 203m is set to ON, the start of the next round is set if the current number of rounds is less than 16 rounds.

  As described above, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated at a rotation speed of one rotation in five seconds, and the distribution member 800 also switches the distribution direction every five seconds. Since the continuation port 901a faces the left flow path port 654a in a state where game balls are distributed to 654, the player can be expected to set (continue) the next round. Therefore, even during the big hit game, it is possible to play the game with interest in the flow of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired during the big hit.

  Further, the positive-variable rotating body 900 is rotated as described above by the first rotating motor 270b (see FIG. 6) constituted by a stepping motor. Similarly, the continuous rotating body 901 is rotated by a second rotating motor 270c (see FIG. 6) constituted by a stepping motor. Here, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the processing of S1011 in the start-up processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the positive variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are initialized. The operation settings are executed. In the setting of the initial operation, the origin position of the first rotating motor 270b and the second rotating body motor 270c (the origin position of the positive variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body) is set.

  The positive-variable rotating body 900 is provided with a detecting piece (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft 900z on the back side of the base plate 651. When the probable variable opening 900a of the probable variable rotating body 900 is turned to a position facing the above-described probable variable channel opening 900k (see FIG. 3A), a detection piece (not shown) is detected by the photo sensor. Is configured. In the initial operation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, based on the fact that the positive rotation rotator 900 is rotated rightward and the photo sensor (not shown) detects the detection piece (not shown), The operation of the first rotation motor 270b is stopped, and the step counter is set to 0. This step counter is a counter for controlling the operation of the first rotary motor 270b, and is configured to be able to determine the rotational position of the variable rotation body 900 from the number of counters. Similarly, for the initial operation of the continuous rotating body 900, when the second rotary motor 270c is rotated to the left and the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor, the operation is stopped, and the step for the second rotary motor 270c is performed. The counter is set to zero. Regarding the continuous rotating body 901, the position where the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor is the position where the continuous flow path 901k and the continuous opening 901a face each other.

  In the present embodiment, the rotational speeds of the constant-variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are set to be constant. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. You may comprise so that it may be determined by lottery. Further, the rotation speed may be changed in a time (for example, every hour) after the power is turned on. In such a configuration, if the rotation speed is set to be high for one hour at the time of turning on the power, in the time zone immediately after the rotation, there are many chances of entering the ball into the probability change port 900a or the continuation port 901a. Thus, a period advantageous to the player can be set.

  In the probable changing game state (high probability game state) in which the special symbol lottery probability is set to a high probability, the special symbol lottery probability is low probability game state (normal game state) after the jackpot game until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. )) Is set to 1/40 of the high probability game state (probable change game state). In the probability-variable gaming state, a time-saving gaming state (a period in which the probability of the ordinary symbol is set to a high probability, the opening time of the electric accessory 64c is lengthened, and the number of times of opening is increased) is also set. Therefore, in the probability changing game state, it is easy to enter the second winning opening 64b, and by winning the second winning opening 64b to the player, the frequency of the prize ball being paid out is increased. The decrease of the holding ball is suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the probable change game state while suppressing the consumption of the possessed ball, and can obtain more jackpots during the jackpot game by obtaining the jackpot in the probable change game state.

  Here, the "special symbol probable change gaming state (high probability state)" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol has increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol probable change). It is a state of a game that easily transitions to a gaming state. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the “high probability state” is referred to as the “special symbol normal game state (low probability state)”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability change state, ie, the special symbol Indicates that the jackpot probability is in a normal state (normal state of a special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (normal symbol time reduction time) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the electric accessory 64c provided along with the second winning opening 64b plays the game ball. This refers to a game state in which the state is easily changed to a state in which the ball is guided to the second winning opening 64b (an inverted C shape (see FIG. 2)), and a ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  Instead of increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol, the time for opening the electrically-driven accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b and the number of times of opening the electrically-driven accessory 64c per one ordinary symbol are changed. Is also good. Also, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” is completed, the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set. ". Instead of the number of special symbol lotteries, the normal symbol time reduction state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the specific entrance 650a is distributed to the positive variable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 by the rotational distribution member 800. The configuration is not limited to the sorting prize winning device 650 in which the ball can enter at the jackpot. For example, the distribution prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened even at a place other than the jackpot, and further, instead of the probability variable rotator 900 and the continuous rotator 901, a configuration is provided in which an entrance for a random symbol lottery is provided. Is also good. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different winning prize balls and different probability of change in the event of a jackpot). For example, you may comprise so that the entrance provided in the arrangement | positioning of the probable rotation body 900 may be more advantageous. The timing at which the distribution winning device 650 is opened may be, for example, a configuration in which it is opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in one hit of the normal symbol, an opening pattern in which the specific ball entrance 650a is opened only during a period in which the rotary distributing member 800 is inclined to the right, and the rotational distributing member 800 is shifted to the left. And an opening pattern in which the specific entrance 650a is opened only during the period of the inclination. That is, as the time-saving state (and the probable change state), there are provided a time-saving state in which a lottery can be executed at an advantageous entrance, and a time-saving state in which a lottery can be executed at a relatively disadvantageous entrance. Is also good.

  With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the entrance where a ball that has entered the inside of the sorting prize winning device 650 enters, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are displayed in a fluctuating manner by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is being executed by a lighting state. Or a special symbol (a first symbol) according to a result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the change, or the ball is entered in the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been changed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to four times, The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. Even when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b, the number of entered balls is retained up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls entering the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less (for example, two times) or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the change is completed.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64a (start winning), a change of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  The fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are respectively stored, the change of the special symbol 2 is set with priority.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are main display areas Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among them, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64a. Ds3 is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the first winning opening 64a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to a maximum of four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated by the small area Ds1 of the corresponding sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, the reserved balls of the second winning opening 64b are similarly set by using a different retained ball number design (for example, a symbol) different from the first winning opening 64a.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first winning port 64a or the second winning port 64b is held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less (for example, two times) or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, by a lighting state, and ends the variation. As a later stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a variation in which a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a second symbol are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b operates for a predetermined time. In this state, the ball is opened (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of four balls, as in the case of the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. The number of times may be set to more than eight times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64a and a second winning opening 64b into which a ball can enter are provided. When a ball enters the first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. At 110, a special symbol 1 is drawn, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly, when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. The special symbol 2 is drawn by the main controller 110, and the display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters. Although details will be described later, the number of winning balls, which is the number of balls won in the switch reading process (S101) of the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first winning port switch or the second winning port switch, and And the number of acquired balls, which is the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls, are stored in a prize detection information area (not shown) of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  A variable winning device 165 is provided at the upper right of the first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 64b. In the open state of the variable prize device 165, a game ball fired so that the game ball passes on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a game ball fired by right-handing) is arranged at a position where it is easy to win. . The variable prize winning device 165 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing door that covers the specific entrance 165a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. ). The specific entrance 165a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter or cannot enter. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific entrance 165a. It operates to alternately repeat the state with the closed state. As described above, the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state when the ninth round to the 16th round are executed during the big hit game.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific entrance 165a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific entrance 165a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the specific entrance 165a while the specific entrance 165a is being opened. May be formed as a special game state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  In addition, a large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b. Are respectively stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the value of the random number which becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 9B) includes a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random hits is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol. The first random number table 202a for special symbols with low probability and the first random number table 202a for special symbols with high probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 9B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability at the time of the high probability (FIG. 9B ) See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C). In the present embodiment, the value “0 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the big hit A is always selected when the big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 9C) is only one type of the big hit A. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of types may be selected. May be configured. In addition, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be set to be different.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "complete departure" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as small as 0 to 79 for low probability use. Is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely off”.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. It should be noted that a fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 10B to 10D) that stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. In the ROM 202.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (b)) and an off-state (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10 (c)). And at least a departure (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D). Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table and the like in the time-saving gaming state are also set.

  With reference to FIG. 10 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is off, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type and obtains it from the out-of-office (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be released when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed the left or right normal entrance (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 10D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number to be a win set by the second random number table (see FIG. 10D), it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10D, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random number values of the jackpot is 24 out of the total number of the random number of 240, and therefore the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first winning port 64a is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first winning opening 64a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when a normal symbol is hit, The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the first winning port 64a is opened “1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, from “30 seconds to 3 seconds”, as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the opening period of the first winning port 64a. Is extremely long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64a. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first winning opening 64a is opened by "1 second × 2 times" when a normal symbol is hit, And the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 21). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, positive change counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, winning detection period storage area 203j, gate clock counter 203k, round start flag 203m, a round counter 203n, a round continuation flag 203p, a probability change flag 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64a, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64a, and as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol starts. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the special symbol 1 or the RAM 233. The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. Then, various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in the normal game state is always predicted in the determination of the prefetch. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the distribution prize device 650 during the jackpot game enters the probability change port 900a (whether or not the game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown)). Since it is determined whether or not the probable game state is set after the big hit game, it is difficult to correctly predict the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol for the winning game ball when the game ball is won. It is. It is to be noted that the probability change game is in progress and the value of the probability change counter 203g is equal to or larger than the reserved ball at the time of winning (the number including the number of reserved and retained before winning), and the fluctuation starts first. If there is no big hit in suspension, the prefetching may be executed in the big hit determination in the probable change game state.

  The special symbol 2 retaining ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), and the first winning port 64a (special symbol 1) is stored in the special symbol 1 retaining ball storing area 203a. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning stored in the other reserved areas is performed. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64a (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64a and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special value 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases by one to four. It is added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 13).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 13 and S505 in FIG. 16). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d in that the first winning opening 64a (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 64b (special symbol 2). Only the other points are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one in the process of S510 in FIG. 16 and decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 13). Also, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2 is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 13, S511 in FIG. 16). reference).

  The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of the holding balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S705 in FIG. 18).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is increased. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. 19). S803: No).

  The probable change counter 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). Indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state. If the value of the probable change counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability change counter 203g is set to zero, and the main controller 110 closes the specific entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific entrance 650a in the final round of the jackpot ( In other words, when the probability change flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the end of the jackpot, that is, when a game ball enters the probability change port 900a and a game ball is detected by a probability change switch (not shown), 100 is set. Is done.

  When the special symbol 1 change start process (S213 in FIG. 15) or the special symbol 2 change start process (S208 in FIG. 14) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process (FIG. 15, S213) or the special symbol 2 change start process (FIG. 14, S208), the value of the probable change counter 203g is referred to. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for use, if the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is selected based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Is performed.

  As described above, the counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The big hit flag 203i is a flag indicating whether a big hit has occurred. When the big hit flag 203i is turned on, the big win game in which the distribution prize device 650 or the variable prize device 165 is set to the open state by the big hit control process (S1105 in FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Is executed.

  The prize detection period storage area 203j is used to count a period that is determined to be valid when a game ball is detected by a positive change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown) of the distribution prize device 650 in the jackpot game. Storage area. When the big hit game of "big hit A" is started, a counter value of 3750 (corresponding to 15 seconds) is set at the start of the round from the first round to the eighth round. Then, at the end of the round, the counter value of 1250 (corresponding to 5 seconds) is reset. Here, at the end of the round, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is forcibly reset even if the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0, that is, even if the detection period remains. Is done. Accordingly, if it is determined that five game balls, which are the closing conditions, have won the second specific entrance 650a before the maximum opening period of 15 seconds of the second specific entrance 650a, the interval time is determined. Is set to a count value corresponding to 5 seconds.

  As a result, even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed, the winning detection period longer than the interval time is set, and the probability change switch (not shown) and the continuation switch (not shown) are set across the rounds. The problem that the detection is determined to be valid can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the second specific entrance 650a is closed, a value corresponding to the same time as the interval time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is stored in the prize detection period storage area 203j. Since it is set, in this case, it is possible to effectively detect a game ball that has entered the certain change port 900a or the continuous port 901a. In the present embodiment, when the closed state is set, the count value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A counter value corresponding to a period obtained by adding 5 seconds to a period required for the game ball entering the sphere to reach the right channel opening 655a or the left channel opening 654a is set in the prize detection period storage area 203j. Is also good. With this configuration, it is effective when a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a at the end of the round is detected by a positive change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown). Can be. Note that this period may be set to a period required until a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is detected by a positive change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown). .

  Also, as in the present embodiment, a valid period of 5 seconds is set at the end of the round, and when that period has elapsed, the probable variable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 is quickly rotated in a direction opposite to the normal direction. Thus, the game balls held may be discharged to the discharge flow path 656. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the game ball entered at the end of the round is determined to be invalid despite being detected by the probability change switch (not shown) or the continuation switch (not shown). be able to. Further, the probable variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 may be configured to rotate in opposite directions based on the round end timing, so as to prevent detection by the probable variable switch or the continuous switch. .

  When the ninth to sixteenth rounds are executed, a value of 7500 corresponding to the round period (30 seconds) is set at the start of the round. In this case, 0 is set at the end of the round. Thus, the end of the round can be determined based on the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j.

  The prize detection period storage area 203j is updated by subtracting 1 from S1402 in the prize detection process (S1302 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The gate clock counter 203k is a counter for determining a cycle of rotating the rotation distribution member 800. The gate clock counter 203k is incremented by one by the processing in S1201 of the gate control processing (S1104 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When the value of the gate clock counter 203k becomes 1250 corresponding to 5 seconds, the rotary distribution member 800 is rotated to guide the game ball to the right channel 655 or the left channel 654. Can be switched. When the value of the gate clock counter 203k becomes 1250, it is reset to 0, which is the initial value.

  The round start flag 203m is a flag indicating that it is time to start a round during the big hit game. When the round start flag 203m is on, it is determined that it is time to start a round. The round start flag 203m is turned on in S219 in the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and in S1427 in the prize detection end process (S1413 in FIG. 26). Here, it is set to ON when it is determined that there is a newly started round. It is set to off at the start of the round.

  The round counter 203n is a counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game. At the start of the jackpot A (S219 in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 13, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110), the round counter 203n is set to 8. Here, 8 which is the minimum number of rounds is set. When it is determined that the ball has entered the continuation port 901a in the sorting prize device 650 and has been detected by a continuation switch (not shown) (a prize detection process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 25, S1302)) (Yes in S1404), 8 is added to the value of the round counter 203n in S1406. Thereby, it is set so that the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds.

  The round continuation flag 203p indicates that a game ball enters the continuation port 901a during the 1 jackpot game (from the first round to the eighth round), a game ball is detected by a continuation switch (not shown), and the number of rounds is reduced. This is a flag indicating that the addition has been performed. The round continuation flag 203p is set to ON in S1405 in the winning detection process (S1302 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, it is set to off in S1424 (at the end of the big hit game) in the winning detection end processing (S1413 in FIG. 26).

  The probability change flag 203r is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the probability change mouth 900a during a jackpot game (from the first round to the eighth round) and a game ball has been detected by a probability change switch (not shown). It is. This probability change flag 203r is set to ON in S1410 in the winning detection process (S1302 in FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, it is set to OFF in S1425 (at the end of the big hit game) in the winning detection end processing (S1413 in FIG. 26).

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with the ROM 202 which stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 has a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B), a first random selection table 202b (see FIG. 9C), a second random number table. At least a table 202c (see FIG. 9D) and a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) are provided. Since each table has already been described, detailed description will be omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific entrance 165a. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward as an axis, a solenoid for sliding a slide member 670 of the sorting and winning device 650, a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64c, and the like is connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. The various switches 208 include sensors (not shown) for detecting winning balls.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out award balls one by one. More specifically, each time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, such as during a big hit, it is possible to suppress the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls without a break, and prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to the melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to a touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a portion touched by the player such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), thereby causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of payouts and the payout suspension period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the pause period may be set to 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a fluctuation pattern effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a. The variation pattern selection table is already known and will be briefly described. However, based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110, the rough variation content (variation time, variation From the type (reach, departure, etc.), a more detailed variation is determined. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode from among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a power off flag 223y, and the like. At least a memory area 223z is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first to fourth areas for special symbol 1 and first to fourth areas for special symbol 2). Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is an area number among the vacant areas of four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small area. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 reserved in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64a, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main When the number of balls has been subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 29). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main controller 110 to 4 as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is added with the number of reserved balls by entering the second winning opening 64b, and the special symbol different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81. The difference is only in that it is used to display the reserved ball number symbol of No. 2 and the other items are the same, so that detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. The drawing of the image is controlled such that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110. And change it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 29), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 29), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2107 in FIG. 33). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. The set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop effect of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The power-off flag 223y is set so that when the main controller 110 detects the power-off, a power-off command is sent to the sound lamp controller 113, and when the sound-lamp controller 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is set, and the power-off processing is executed (S1616 in FIG. 28). Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 27) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area in the RAM is cleared and the data read process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S1510 in FIG. 27). As a result, the game information stored by the data storage process when the power is turned off can be used again by the data reading process in the startup process when the power is restored, and the game information before the power loss occurs can be used again, and the navigation game can be continuously executed. be able to.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. Since the display control device 114 has a known configuration, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). In the switch reading process (S101), for example, in order to calculate the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the jackpot game according to the number of game balls that have won the distribution prize port 650a, the distribution prize device 650 is used. The state of the provided magnetic sensor 659 is detected.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first winning opening 64a (S105). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 and FIG.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display is retained in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variation in the special symbol 2) The number of display suspensions N2) is acquired (S203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a sphere of change display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. If it is determined (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is determined. ) Is determined to be 0 (S209: No), it is determined that there is no suspended ball of the variable display in the special symbol, and this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the setting of the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is determined to be 0 (S204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be larger than 0 (S204: No). (S209: Yes), the same process as the above-described process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is performed on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 14 or a special symbol 1 change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 2 change start process or the special symbol 1 change start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thus, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is displayed. It is determined whether it is a symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned on (S218), the round counter 203n is set to 8 and the round start flag 203m is turned on (S217). S219). Then, a jackpot start command is set (S220), the value of the probability change counter 203g is reset (S221), and the process proceeds to S222.

  According to the jackpot flag 203i set to ON in the process of S218, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) of the main process (see FIG. 22) described later, the process in the jackpot game is executed. A specific description will be given later in a jackpot control process (see FIG. 24).

  Also, by setting the round counter 203n to 8 and turning on the round start flag 203m in the processing of S219, the round counter 203n is set in the big hit control processing (see FIG. 24) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) described later. The special game of the round (8 rounds) according to the value obtained is executed. Although the details will be described later, it is assumed that the special game of eight rounds is executed by setting 8 to the round counter 203n in the processing of S219, and the winning is continuously performed by the prize detecting process (FIG. 25) during the execution of the special game. If determined, 8 is additionally set to the round counter 203n (S1406), and a special game of 8 rounds (a total of 16 rounds) is further executed.

  The jackpot start command set in the process of S220 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is externally output by a main process (see FIG. 22) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201 (S1101). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. As a result, a display indicating the start of the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made aware of the transition to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S223), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is determined. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S223: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0 (S223: No), the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S221, S223 or S224, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216, and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, the present process ends.

  Next, the special symbol 2 change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (S208). This special symbol 2 change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is executed in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 2 change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 of the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Are obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the processing of S301 is a positive change in order to determine whether or not the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S302). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability change counter 203g is larger than 0.

  If it is determined that the probability change counter 203g is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), a lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first random number table 202a (S303). ), And the process proceeds to S305. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the large hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the high probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S303). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be out of range (see FIG. 9B). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change counter 203g is not on (S302: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the large hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a as to whether or not a big hit is determined (S302). S304), and the process proceeds to S305. Here, the special symbol lottery result is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the large hit determination value (FIG. 9B) at the low probability in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the set values (hit values) one by one (S304). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "0", it is determined that a big hit has occurred, and if the value is in the range of "1 to 399", it is determined that the hit has occurred (see FIG. 9B).

  In the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a big hit (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a big hit (S305: Yes), the big hit is determined. Is set (S306). In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the big hit symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determines the type of stop to be displayed. For example, “missing reach”, “completely missing”, and the like are defined as the stop types.

  Next, in the process of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the display mode set in the process of S306. Also, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S307). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203j of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the large hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, normal reach is set. When the value is in the range of “51 to 179”, super reach is set. A fluctuation pattern is determined (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 is out of the way (S305: No), a display mode of the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Determines the type of stop to be displayed. For example, “missing reach”, “completely missing”, and the like are defined as the stop types.

  Next, the deviation pattern is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as in the process of S307. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 22). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the special symbol 1 change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S213). This special symbol 1 change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 13) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, the same process as the special symbol 2 change start process (S208) is performed on the special symbol 1. The data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol 1 is acquired by the process of S401, and thereafter, the same process as the process in the special symbol 2 change start process (S208) is performed on the special symbol 1. Since the specific contents are the same as those in the special symbol 2 change start process (S208), the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning opening 64a. This is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values held by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (start winning) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than four. If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing are acquired, and the special It is stored in the symbol 1 holding sphere storage area (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second winning opening 64b (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 64b (S507: Yes), the same process as that in the case of winning in the first winning opening 64a is performed on the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S510), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S511). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type counter C3 are acquired, stored in the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area (S512), and the process proceeds to S513.

  If there is no winning in the second winning opening 64b (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 64b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4. (S509: No), the process proceeds to S513.

  Here, the look-ahead processing in S513 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513). This look-ahead process (S513) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 16).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b (S601: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (S602). Then, a winning information command is set based on the result of the lottery (S603), and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot game of jackpot A, a game ball passes through a certain-variable switch (not shown) in the certain-variable channel opening 900k, so that a certain-variable game state is set. In the case of the certainty-variable gaming state, it is determined whether or not a big hit is based on the big hit determination value for high probability in the first hit random number table 202a. Here, at the point in time when the pre-reading process is executed, it can be determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A, but in the jackpot game, the game ball passes through a positive change switch (not shown) in the positive change channel opening 900k. Cannot be determined. That is, at the time when the pre-reading process is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the game state is the certainty-changing game state.

  Therefore, in the case of determining the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit in the pre-reading process (S507), the determination value for the low probability in the first random number table is determined irrespective of whether or not the probability change game state is set. I will use it. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the first random number table 202a, it is defined that the jackpot determination value for low probability is included in the jackpot determination value for high probability. Specifically, the jackpot determination value for high probability is “0-9”, and the jackpot determination value for low probability is “0”. This allows the value of the first random number counter C1 to reach a jackpot at a low probability regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through a certain-variable switch (not shown) in the certain-variable channel opening 900k to enter the certain-variable game state. If the determination value is “0”, it can be determined that a big hit has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the second symbol change display performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the electric control attached to the second winning opening 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the working hours are reduced (S708). It is determined whether or not the working hours are being reduced based on whether or not the probability is changing (whether or not the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0). In the present embodiment, the time saving game state and the probable change game state are configured to be set at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a time reduction game state may be provided separately from the probable change game state.

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the working hours are reduced (the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S709). ). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is difficult to win. This means that during a special symbol jackpot (that is, during a special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize at the specific entrance 165a. In this case, when the motorized accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened, the ball intended to win the specific winning opening 165a tends to enter the second winning opening 64b. It is difficult to make the specific entrance 165a win. Therefore, during the special symbol jackpot, the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is made hard to be opened, so that the gaming ball can be easily won in the specific opening 165a. Since the specific entrance 165a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64a, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the first winning opening 64a during a special symbol jackpot, the first winning opening 64a is provided. Many balls enter the mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9D).

  In the processing of S708, when the working hours are not reduced (S708: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 is Based on the probability random second hit random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9D).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the time reduction is being performed (S714). If the time reduction is being performed (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 64b as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, similarly to the case where the normal symbol comes off. The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 64c are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not during the special symbol jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two times (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the processing of S714, if it is not during the working hours reduction (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the working hours are reduced (S719). If the working hours are reduced (S719: Yes), the changing time of the changing display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( (S720), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not during the working hours reduction (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. Since the opening period of the motorized accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is extremely long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 64b. State.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64c associated with the second winning opening 64b is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 22) is executed next, the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the flow proceeds to a step S107. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is retained in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 If not (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not, it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process also shifts to S1012 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1012 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is also performed when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1004: No), S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, initial operations of the distribution motor 270a, the first rotation motor 270b, and the second rotation motor 270c are set (S1020). In this initial operation, each motor is rotated in a predetermined direction, the operation is stopped at the origin position (the position where the detection piece is detected by the photo sensor), and each step counter is set to 0. Is done. Here, the origin position of the rotation distributing member 800 is a position at which the game ball is guided to the right flow path 655 (solid line position in FIG. 3A). The position of the continuous rotating body 901 is opposite to the position of the continuous flow path 901k (in FIG. 3A). (A position rotated by 180 degrees from the position shown). The interruption is permitted (S1011), and the processing shifts to the main processing described later.

  As described above, the initial positions (origin positions) of the probable variable rotator 900, the continuous rotator 901 and the rotation distributing member 800 are set by the start-up process (see FIG. 21). Each position of the rotation distribution member 800 can be accurately determined from the step counter. As described above, by determining each position and notifying the position to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command, it is possible to set an effect of notifying the player of each position by the sound lamp control device 113. it can. Specifically, the flow distribution member 800 notifies the flow path to which the game ball is guided, or determines whether the position where the game ball can enter the probability changing port 900a and the continuation port 901a. The effect to inform can be performed. This allows the player to expect a game ball to enter the probability changing port 900a and the continuation port 901a by the effect during the jackpot game, or to allow the player to enter the game ball with aim.

  Note that, in this effect, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 executes a predetermined lottery and wins, it notifies the player, sets a plurality of jackpot types, and notifies the player according to the jackpot type. May be set to be variable.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1109 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 13) and the start winning process (see FIG. 16) and the winning information command set in the prefetch process (see FIG. 17). Send to Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the jackpot start command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 13) and the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and the gate control process is executed (S1104). Details of the processing in S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific entrance (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 165 is executed (S1105). In the jackpot control process, the specific entrance 165a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific entrance 165a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific entrance 165a. I do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific entrance 165a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific entrance 165a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. After the specific entrance 165a is closed in the last round, the end of the jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the processing in S1105 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric auditors accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric auditors accessory 64c attached to the second winning opening 64b is executed (S1106). In the electric auditors product opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is started when the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64c is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 18). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. , In the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 14) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, The variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes from S1101 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1110: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1111, S1112).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1112).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1109 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the first variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1109, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at S1113 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1114). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1115), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1109 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the gate control process (S1104). This gate control processing (S1104) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern big hit state, the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is switched to distribute. This is a process for distributing a game ball having entered the entrance 650a to the left channel 654 or the right channel 655.

  In the gate control process, first, 1 is added to the gate clock counter 203k (S1201). Next, it is determined whether or not the gate clock counter 203k is larger than 1250 (S1202). When it is determined that the gate clock counter 203k is greater than 1250 (S1202: Yes), the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is switched by driving the accessory motor 270a (S1203), and the gate clock counter 203k is reset. It is initialized to 0 (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  Here, since the gate control process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms in the main process, the position of the distribution member can be switched every time the value of the gate clock counter 203k becomes 1250 (that is, every 5 seconds). it can. In addition, the position of the rotary distribution member 800 may be a position at which a game ball having entered the distribution entrance 650a is distributed to the left flow path 654 (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3A) or a right flow path 655. The position is switched by the accessory motor 270a so as to be at one of the positions (the position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 3A).

  When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, the first rotation data is set (S1206), and the second rotation data is set (S1207). After that, a rotator command is set (S1208), and the process ends.

  The drive of the first rotation motor 270b is controlled by the first rotation data set in the processing of S1206. For example, when a big hit occurs, the rotation speed of the first rotary motor 270b may be changed according to the big hit type. As a result, the rotation of the continuous rotating body 901 changes, and the interest of the player can be improved as compared with a monotonous gaming machine in which the continuous rotating body 901 rotates at a constant speed. Further, if the rotation operation of the continuous rotating body 901 is set to be slow, it is easy for the player to play a game aiming for a continuous winning, and the rotation operation of the continuous rotating body 901 is set to be fast. If this is done, a continuous winning lottery can be selected in a short time, that is, a gaming machine capable of executing many continuous winning lotteries in one round can be provided.

  In the processing of S1206 and the processing of S1207, the set rotation speed of the rotation motors (270b, 270c) may be changed at a predetermined timing. And a slow rotation speed may be set alternately. Further, the first rotation data and the second rotation data may be data of a plurality of rotation speeds and switching timing thereof. For example, a half rotation may be a high rotation speed and the remaining half rotation may be a low rotation speed. Thereby, it is possible to set so that the half rotation in which each winning opening (900a, 901a) of each rotating body (900, 901) is the upper half has a low rotation speed, and the remaining half rotation has a high rotation speed. As a result, it is possible to easily adjust each winning opening (900a, 901a) to win, or to make it difficult to win if not adjusted.

  The second rotation data set in the processing of S1207 is different from the processing of S1206 in that the drive of the second rotation motor 270c is controlled and the rotation operation of the positive-variable rotating body 900 is adjusted, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the processing of S1206 and the processing of S1207 described above, the rotation speeds of the respective rotation motors (270b, 270c) may be set to be different or may be set to be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gate control process is executed in the main process. However, the gate control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), or it is determined whether the big hit game is being executed. The gate control process may be performed only during the execution of the jackpot game.

  The rotating body command set by the processing of S1208 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 sets a sound effect based on the reception of the rotator command, and transmits the display rotator command to the display controller 114. Thereby, it is possible to output a sound effect and a display in accordance with the operations of the accessory motor 270a, the first rotation motor 270b, and the second rotation motor 270c set based on the processing of the gate control processing (S1104). .

  Specifically, the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is a position where the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution prize winning device 650 is distributed to the left flow path 654, and The timing at which the continuation opening 901a becomes a position where the game ball can easily enter (upward position), that is, the timing at which the game ball entering the distribution entrance 650a with a high probability has a continuous winning is calculated. Generate a rotator command to notify the timing. As a result, at the timing when it is easy to continuously win, a sound effect for performing the notification is output, and the effect display is displayed (see FIG. 36A). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotation allocating member 800 based on the gate clock counter 203k and the rotation speed of the continuous rotating body 901 based on the first rotation data set in the processing of S1206. Further, as described above, the position of the continuous rotating body 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown).

  In the same way, the position of the rotary distribution member 800 is set to the position where the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution prize device 650 is distributed to the right channel 655, and When the continuation opening 900a of the certain variable rotator 900 is at a position where the game ball can easily enter (upward position), an effect display for notifying the user is displayed (see FIG. 36 (b)). This timing is calculated based on the operation timing of the rotation allocating member 800 based on the gate clock counter 203k, and the rotation speed of the positive variable rotating body 900 based on the second rotation data set in the process of S1207. Further, as described above, the position of the positive variable rotator 901 is calculated by the origin sensor which is a photo sensor (not shown).

  Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily determine the timing at which the game ball is won to the sorting ball opening 650a of the sorting winning device 650.

  In the present embodiment, the determination value of the gate clock counter 203k is 1250 (a value at which the switching timing is 5 seconds), but may be a smaller value or a larger value.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1105). The jackpot control process (S1105) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific entrance opening is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the 165a or the second specific entrance 650a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i is on (S1105). In the process of S1105, if the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203i is turned on in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), it means that the special symbol is in the big hit, so the winning detection processing is executed (S1302). This prize detection processing (S1302) is processing for performing processing according to a prize of a continuous prize or a certain change prize, the end of the prize detection period, or the like in a prize detection period provided in each round in a jackpot game. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is determined whether the round start flag 203m is on (S1303). If the round start flag 203m is on (S1303: Yes), it is the timing to start a new round, so that the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is opened according to the number of newly started rounds. It is set (S1304), and the winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of newly started rounds (S1305).

  Specifically, as described above, in the jackpot game of 1 to 8 rounds, the second specific entrance 650a is opened so that the sorting lottery is executed, and in the jackpot game of 9 to 16 rounds, the sorting is performed. The lottery is not executed, and the specific entrance 165a is opened.

  Also, the round start flag 203m is set to ON because the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309), and the prize detection period based on the number of completed rounds ends. This is the case (see S1427 in FIG. 26). Here, the prize detection period set when the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied is 5 seconds in rounds 1 to 8 (1250 is set in the prize detection period storage area 203j). ), Which is 3 seconds in rounds 9 to 16 (750 is set in the win detection period storage area 203j), so that in rounds 1 to 8, the interval time until the start of the next round is 5 seconds. In the 9-16 round, the interval time is 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval time and the prize detection period are set to be the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize detection period may be longer than the interval time. Alternatively, the winning detection period may be shorter than the interval time.

  Here, in the big hit game of 9 to 16 rounds, since the specific entrance 165a is opened and the second specific entrance 650a is not opened, there is no need to detect a continuous winning or a certain change winning. Further, in this case, if a continuous winning or a probable change winning is detected, there is a possibility that the game ball has been awarded illegally, so that an error is notified to suppress such injustice. be able to. Further, in the jackpot game of 9 to 16 rounds, since it is not necessary to detect a continuous winning or a probable change winning, by setting the winning detecting period storage area 203j to 0, each winning is not detected. Is also good. In this case, a separate timer or counter may be provided to measure the elapsed opening time of the specific entrance (65a, 650a), and the closing condition may be determined based on the timer or counter.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the settings are made as described above in the processing of S1304 and S1305. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific entrance 165a may or may not be opened in rounds 1 to 8. The interval may be 3 seconds or 10 seconds, the prize detection period storage area 203j may be set to 2000 or 7500, and the second specific entrance 650a is similarly opened in 9 to 16 rounds. Alternatively, the set values of the interval and the winning detection period storage area 203j may be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of rounds may be divided into 1 to 3 rounds and 4 to 16 rounds, different settings may be set for each round, or the same settings may be set for all rounds.

  Thereafter, the round start flag 203m is turned off (S1306), and the round counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S1307). Here, when the round counter 203n set at the start of the jackpot becomes 0 (when eight rounds are completed) by subtracting 1 from the round counter 203n, the winning detection end process (see FIG. 26) described later will be performed. You can execute the settings at the end. In the winning detection process (see FIG. 25), the round counter 203n is incremented by 8 in the process of S1406 when a continuous winning is made. In this case, the round counter 203n becomes 0 only for 16 rounds. Is completed, and a jackpot game of 16 rounds can be executed.

  After the processing of S1307 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1308), and this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round start flag 203m is off in the process of S1303 (S1303: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed after opening the specific entrance 165a or the second specific entrance 650a (when the value of the prize detection period storage area 203j becomes 0), or the specific entrance If a predetermined number of balls have been won after opening the mouth 165a or the second specific ball entrance 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. Here, in the processing of S1303, as described above, if the jackpot game is 1 to 8 rounds, 15 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 3750 has become 0), or It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when five game balls have won the second specific entrance 650a. On the other hand, in the case of 9 to 16 rounds, when 30 seconds have elapsed (when the winning detection period storage area 203j set to 7500 has become 0), or when 10 game balls have won the specific entrance 165a. It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. The present embodiment is set as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rounds 1 to 8 may be performed when 30 seconds have elapsed, rounds 9 to 16 may be performed when 15 seconds have elapsed, and rounds 1 to 8 may be performed when winning 10 balls. , 9 to 16 rounds may be at the time of winning five balls. Also, the method of dividing the rounds is not limited to this, and may be defined as one to two rounds and three to sixteen rounds, may be different closing conditions for each round, or may be the same for all rounds It may be a condition.

  In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is not satisfied (S1309: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second specific entrance 650a is satisfied (S1309: Yes), the second specific entrance 650a is closed (S1310), and the round ended this time. The winning detection period storage area 203j is reset based on the number (S1311), and the process ends.

  Specifically, the process of S1309 is to reset the prize detection period storage area 203j to 1250 at the end of the 1st to 8th rounds, and to reset the prize detection period storage area 203j to 750 at the end of the 9th to 16th rounds. To set. This is because in the first to eighth rounds, the second specific entrance 650a is opened, so that at the end of the first to eighth rounds, game balls may remain inside the sorting prize winning device 650. is there.

  Here, based on the establishment of the closing condition (S1309: Yes), the winning detection period storage area 203j is reset, so that even after the second specific entrance 650a is closed by the processing of S1310, the game ball is not removed. Gaming balls remaining inside the sorting prize winning device 650 (such as the sorting ball opening 650a, the left flow path 654 or the right flow path 655) may pass through the continuous flow path port 901k or the positively variable flow path port 900k. In this case, by resetting the prize detection period storage area 203j to 1250, it is possible to detect a prize based on the passage of each channel for 5 seconds after the closing condition is satisfied. As a result, game balls remaining inside the sorting prize winning device 650 (such as the sorting ball opening 650a, the left flow path 654, or the right flow path 655) enter the continuous flow path port 901k or the positively variable flow path port 900k. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress a problem that a continuous prize or a probable change prize is not obtained.

  In the 9th to 16th rounds, the prize detection period storage area 203j is reset, so that it is possible to detect that the prize has been illegally won at the second specific entrance 650a.

  Note that the value of the winning detection period storage area 203j set here may be changed as appropriate according to the configuration of the distribution winning device 650. For example, the left flow path 654 and the right flow path 655 of the sorting prize winning device 650 are long, and the game ball entering the sorting ball opening 650a enters either the continuous channel opening 901k or the certain change winning prize opening 900k. If it takes about 10 seconds at the maximum, it may be set to be 10 seconds, or may be set to be 5 seconds, and a winning after 5 seconds has elapsed may not be regarded as a winning.

  Further, it may be configured such that it is determined whether there is a game ball remaining inside the distribution winning device 650, and if it is determined that there is no game ball, the winning detection period is ended. For example, the number of game balls entering the sorting ball inlet 650a of the sorting prize winning device 650 after the closing condition is satisfied, and the number of game balls passing through the continuous channel opening 901k, the positive variable channel opening 900k, and the outlet 657 are different. It may be determined whether or not they match, and if they do match, it may be determined that there is no game ball remaining inside the sorting and winning device 650. Thereby, when there is no game ball remaining inside the sorting prize winning device 650, the prize detection period can be ended, so that it is difficult to illegally continue the prize or change the winning prize. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 650a can be determined by using the magnetic sensor 659 to determine whether the game balls that have entered the continuous flow path opening 901 have a continuation switch ( (Not shown), a game ball that has entered the certain-variable channel opening 900k can be detected using a certain-variable switch (not shown).

  Next, the winning detection process (S1302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1105). The winning detection process (S1302) is a process executed when a jackpot game is being executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 24), and determines whether or not there is a winning of a game ball in the distribution winning device 650. This is a process for detecting.

  In the winning detection processing (S1302), first, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401). In the processing of S1401, when it is determined that the prize detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1401: No), the prize detection period is an unnecessary period due to an interval between rounds or the like, and thus this processing is ended as it is. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the prize detection period storage area 203j is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the prize detection period storage area 203j is decremented by 1 (S1402), and the process proceeds to S1403. Here, the winning detection process (S1302) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 24) in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed every 4 ms, and thus the winning detection period storage area 203j is decremented by one. Every 4 ms. As described above, the winning detection period storage area 203j is set based on the number of rounds newly started in the processing of S1305 of the jackpot control processing (S1105). If the number of rounds is 1 to 8, 3750 is set. Therefore, the opening time of the second specific entrance 650a for rounds 1 to 8 is 15 seconds. If the number of rounds is 9 to 16, 7500 is set, so that the opening time of the specific entrance 165a for 9 to 16 rounds is 30 seconds.

  Upon completion of the process in S1402, it is determined whether the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403). If the round continuation flag 203p is on (S1403: Yes), the processing based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) has already been executed, so the processing of S1404 to S1407 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1408. Transition.

  On the other hand, if the round continuation flag 203p is not on (is off) (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous prize (S1404). Here, a continuous prize is obtained when a game ball enters the continuous flow passage opening 901k. When a game ball enters the continuous flow passage opening 901k, the passage of the game ball is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). Based on the detection by the switch reading process (S101) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), it is stored as winning detection information. In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not there is a continuous winning based on the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101).

  In the case where there is no continuous winning in the processing of S1404 (S1404: No), the processing of S1405 to S1407 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S1408. On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, if there is a continuous winning (S1404: Yes), as a processing based on the continuous winning, the round continuation flag 203p is set to ON (S1405), and 8 is added to the round counter 203n (S1406). ), A continuous winning command is set (S1407), and the flow shifts to the process of S1408.

  The round continuation flag 203p set by the processing of S1405 can prevent the processing of the processing based on the continuous winning (S1405 to S1407) from being performed repeatedly as described above. In addition, the round counter 203n added by the processing of S1406 allows the jackpot game to be executed up to 16 rounds based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k. Further, the continuous winning command set by the processing of S1407 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the continuous winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a continuous winning sound and transmits the display continuous winning command to the display control device 114. When receiving the display continuous winning command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a display indicating that continuous winning has been achieved. Thereby, based on the entry of the game ball into the continuous flow path opening 901k, the winning sound and the display on the third symbol display device 81 can notify the player of the continuous winning.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203r is ON (S1408). In the processing of S1408, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203r is ON (S1408: Yes), it is after the processing based on the probability change prize (S1410 to S1411) has already been executed, as in the processing of S1403. , Skip the processing of S1409 to S1411 and proceed to the processing of S1412.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the probability change flag is not on (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a probability change prize (S1409). This probability change prize is determined in the same manner as in the process of S1404 as to whether or not there is a continuous prize, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1409 that there is no probability change prize, the processing of S1410 and S1411 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1412. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1409 that there is a probability change prize, the probability change flag 203r is set to ON (S1410), a probability change prize command is set (S1411), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1412.

  In the processing of S1412, it is determined whether or not the winning detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412). If it is determined in the processing of S1412 that the prize detection period storage area 203j is not 0 (S1412: No), it is not the timing to end the prize detection, so the processing of S1413 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1412, when it is determined that the prize detection period storage area 203j is 0 (S1412: Yes), it is the timing to end the prize detection, so that the prize detection end processing is executed (S1413). Then, the present process ends.

  Here, the winning detection end processing (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning detection end processing (S1413). The prize detection end processing (S1413) is executed when the prize detection period storage area 203j becomes 0 in the prize detection processing (see FIG. 25) and the prize detection ends.

  In the winning detection end processing (S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the round counter 203n is 0 (S1420). In the process of S1420, when it is determined that the round counter is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1420: No), the round start flag 203m is set because there is still a round to be executed in the jackpot game. It is set to ON (S1427), and this processing ends.

  According to the round start flag 203m set here, in the big hit control process (see FIG. 24), processes related to the start of the round (S1304 to S1308) are executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1420 that the round counter 203n is 0, it is the end timing of the jackpot game, so it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203r is ON (S1421). If there is, the probability change counter is set to 100 (S1422). If it is not on, the process of S1422 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1423.

  As described above, the probability change flag 203r is set to ON when a game ball enters the probability change channel opening 900k of the sorting prize winning device 650. Thereby, based on the entry of a game ball into the certain variation channel opening 900k, the certain variation game state can be set for 100 times. In the present embodiment, the certainty-change game state is provided for 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the certainty-change game state may be set until the next big hit.

  In the processing of S1423, the end of the big hit is set (S1423), the round continuation flag 203p, the probability change flag 203r, and the big hit flag 203i are turned off (S1424, S1425), and the big hit end command is set based on the number of rounds. (S1426), this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1616 (see FIG. 28). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 28), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1616. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1616 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1502: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1616 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1504. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, since the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1616, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1616 (see S1615 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is performed, the process of S1508 in a state where the power-off flag 223y is turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of a power outage and the execution of the power-off process of S1616 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1509), and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1511).

  Next, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511), interruption permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1508 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of steps S1504 to S1506 is performed via step S1508. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), the processing of S1509 to S1510, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1511, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1511). Interrupt permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1509 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1504 to S1508 via the process of S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1504. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the processing of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1602 to S1610 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1611, and the variable display setting process of S1612 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1602). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on the reserved lamp is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a predetermined period such as a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed, when the preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to obtain the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. Is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the effect can be changed to an effect that can have a sense of expectation of a jackpot, or the frame button 22 is a determination button for selecting one of a plurality of reach effects. It is good.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. After performing the process of S1610, the process moves to the process of S1611.

  In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the command determination processing, a variable display setting processing is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S1612, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1613 (S1613: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1615), and the power-off processing is executed (S1616). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1617), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1614: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Here, for a detailed description of each process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the above-described sound lamp control device 113, for convenience, after the details of the command determination process (S1611) are described first, The variable display setting process (S1612) will be described in order.

  Next, the command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination process (S1611), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1701). If the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). If the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1707). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (special) The number of times N1 of the variable display in the symbol 1 is retained or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2 is retained) is extracted. It is stored in the number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1708), and the process returns to the main processing. In the process of S1708, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball has won the first winning opening 64a (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn, so that the starting winning is determined. Every time it is detected, or every time a special symbol 1 or a special symbol 2 is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed by the processing of S1708. Can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when detecting a start winning or drawing a special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1708 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1707, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1707: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1709: Yes), the lottery result in the special symbol is extracted as the winning information from the received command, and the winning information storing area of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is obtained. 223a is stored in the first area (S1710), and the process returns to the main processing. In the process of S1710, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1709 (S1709: No), then it is determined whether or not a command relating to the jackpot has been received (S1711). If a command related to the jackpot has been received (S1711: Yes), a process related to the jackpot corresponding to the received command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process.

  Examples of the command relating to the jackpot include a jackpot start command, a round number command, and a jackpot end command. Specifically, for example, if the received command is a jackpot start command, the sound information at the start of the jackpot is set, and a display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts a big hit effect. Thereby, at the time of the start of the big hit, the sound and the display of the big hit effect can be outputted and notified to the player. Similar processing is executed for the round number command and the jackpot end command.

  In the process of S1711, when the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S1711: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the accessory has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713). If a command related to the accessory is received (S1713: Yes), an accessory-related process is executed (S1714), and the process returns to the main process. Details of the accessory-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1713, if a command relating to an accessory has not been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not a continuous winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1715). Then, when the continuous winning command is received (S1715: Yes), the continuous winning process is executed (S1716), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the continuous winning processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1715, when the continuous winning command has not been received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the positive change winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1717). Then, when the certain-change winning command is received (S1717: Yes), the certain-change winning process is executed (S1718), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this probability change winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1717, if the positive change winning command has not been received (S1717: No), processing according to the other received command is executed (S1719), and the process returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. The command is set so as to be transmitted to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the accessory-related process (S1714), which is one of the command determination processes (S1611 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this accessory-related processing (S1714). This accessory-related process (S1714) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines a command related to the accessory received from the main control device 110. And execute a process corresponding to the command.

  In the accessory-related processing (S1714), first, it is determined whether or not a switching command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1801). If a switching command has been received (S1801: Yes), a switching sound is set (S1802), a display switching command is set (S1803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The display switching command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display switching command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display suggesting the switching. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when a game ball that the rotation distribution member 800 has entered the distribution entrance 650a of the distribution prize winning device 650 is distributed to the left flow path 654, "left." In addition to the output of the voice of "Y", the display of "Continuous lottery" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the voice is distributed to the right channel 655, the voice of "Right" is output. At the same time as the output, the display of “probably changing lottery” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and suggestions may be displayed in other forms (characters, screen colors, etc.). Also, without displaying a display suggesting the switching, the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening 650a of the distribution prize winning device 650 is displayed to the player by the left channel 654 and the right channel 655. It may not be possible to recognize to which of the two is assigned.

  In the process of S1801, if a switching command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether a rotator command has been received (S1804). If a rotator command has been received (S1804: Yes), a sound effect is set based on the received rotator command (S1805), a rotator command for display is set (S1806), and the process returns to the command determination process. .

  The display rotator command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display switching command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform display based on the display rotator command. More specifically, as described above, the notification of the timing at which the player easily wins a continuation prize or a certain change prize is set, which is set in the gate control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily determine the timing at which the game ball is won to the sorting ball opening 650a of the sorting winning device 650.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1804, if the rotating body command has not been received (S1804: No), the processing of S1805 and S1806 is skipped, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the continuous prize winning process (S1716), which is one of the command determination processes (S1611 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the continuous winning process (S1716). This continuous winning process (S1716) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process according to the continuous winning command received from the main control device 110. Execute

  In the continuous winning processing (S1716), first, a continuous winning sound is set (S1901), and thereafter, a display continuous winning command is set (S1902), and the process returns to the command determination processing. The display continuous winning command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S1602) of the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display continuous winning command, a display indicating that a continuous winning has occurred is executed (FIG. 37A). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous prize has been won, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when a continuous prize is won, the occurrence of the continuous prize is notified to the player by sound and display by the processing of S1901 and S1902. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notification may be performed only by the display or only the display, or may not be performed. If the continuation prize is not notified, the player determines whether or not the jackpot game is to be continued depending on whether the ninth round is started. Therefore, the player determines whether or not the jackpot game is continued until the ninth round. It will be noted whether or not. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of a certain-variation-winning-time process (S1718), which is one of the command determination processes (S1611 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the probable change winning process (S1718). The process of winning a certain prize (S1718) is executed in the command determining process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and is a process corresponding to the winning prize command received from the main controller 110. Execute

  In the probability change winning process (S1718), first, a probability change winning sound is set (S2001), a probability change winning command for display is set (S2002), and the process returns to the command determination process. The certain change winning command for display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display-specific prize-winning command, a display indicating that a variance-winning prize has occurred is executed (FIG. 37B). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous prize has been won, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where a win has occurred, the processing of S2001 and S2002 notifies the player of the occurrence of the win with a sound and display, but the present invention is not limited to this. The notification may be performed only by the display or only the display, or may not be performed. If the notification is not made, the player cannot determine whether or not the game is in the certainty-changing game state, and thus it is difficult to quit the game until the 100 times of the game that may be in the certainty-changeable game state are completed. This can encourage the player to play the game for a long time.

  Next, details of the variable display setting processing (S1612) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1612). The variable display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2106. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S2101: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S2102), and then, in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), the change pattern is set. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 to the execution area side is performed. . More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S2106.

  In the process of S2106, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2106). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2106: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2106: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2107), and then, in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2108).

  Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110.

  In the process of S2110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2110). Then, the present process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the first embodiment, whether the game ball is easily guided to the probable rotating body 900 or the state where the game ball is easily guided to the continuous rotating body 901 depending on the start timing of the jackpot game. Are configured to be variable depending on the rotation position and rotation timing of the rotation distribution member 800. Therefore, it can be configured such that the degree of expectation for a certain change or the degree of expectation for a 16-round big hit varies depending on the start timing (big hit) of the big hit game. Therefore, even when the special symbol determination result is a big hit, the player can play the game with an interest in whether a certainty change is provided or 16 rounds are provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the sorting prize device 650 in which the 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the 16 rounds (continuous lottery) and the probability change lottery is set to the open state. In addition, the variable prize winning device 165 is set to the open state in the jackpot of the ninth round and the winning of the 16th round. Therefore, from the first round to the eighth round, the game is played by opening the sorting prize winning device 650 which makes it difficult to win the game ball than the variable prize winning device 165, so that the player can change the probability change mouth 900a and the continuation mouth 901a. The player can concentrate on whether the ball can be played. Also, in the 9th to 16th round jackpot games, the variable prize winning device 165 in which the game ball is easy to enter is opened and the game is played, so that the jackpot game can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the rotation distributing member 800 is configured to be rotated every 5 seconds, the player determines whether to aim at the probable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 to play the game. Can also be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to determine which of the five lots that can be entered into the second specific entrance 650a is used more frequently for the lottery of the probability change and the continuation (16-round jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the second specific entrance 650a from the first round to the eighth round is set to 15 seconds, but by setting it to 5 seconds, the rotating body that can be aimed at in one round is limited, and the round starts. Also, the privilege that can be given to the player can be changed according to the start timing of the jackpot game.

  In addition, by configuring the open state and the closed state of the second specific entrance 650a repeatedly in a short time (for example, 1 second) in one round, the player can switch between the probable variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901. You may comprise so that it may be difficult to aim at either intentionally.

<First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a enters either the probable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 by the rotational distribution member 800. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the first embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the probable opening 900a of the probable rotating body 900, the game ball is guided to the continuous rotating body 901. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured as described above. In addition, about the same structure as 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a view showing the game board 13 according to a first modification of the first embodiment. The first modification of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the distribution prize device 650 is changed. Here, the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 650 in the first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the sorting prize winning device 650 with the front cover body 652 removed. The distribution prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 3A) in the first embodiment is a device in which a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is guided by the probable variable rotating body 900 to the channel wall portion. A magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the sorting ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 650.

  In addition, when a game ball that has entered the rotation entrances 900b to 900d of the probable rotating body 900 is discharged to the discharge flow path 662, the discharge flow path 662 is configured to guide the game ball to the continuous rotary body 901. They differ in that they do. The description of the same configuration is omitted.

  The game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is guided to the probable rotating body 900, and when the winning ball 900a is won, the probable rotating body 900 rotates rightward to the probable flow path 900k. You will be guided by that. Thereafter, the probability change flag 203r is set to ON by being detected by a probability change switch (not shown). Note that, as in the first embodiment, up to five balls enter the second specific entrance 650a in one round. The configuration is such that game balls easily enter the mouth 900a. In the first modification of the first embodiment, the maximum opening time of the second specific entrance 650a is set to 5 seconds from the first round to the eighth round, and the second specific entrance The period during which game balls can enter the mouth 650a is short. In addition, since a game ball is fired 100 times in one minute by the firing device, it becomes 1.6 in one second, and about eight game balls can be fired in five seconds. Therefore, it is difficult for five game balls to enter the second specific entrance 650a in consideration of being distributed by the game nail.

  In addition, since a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the probable opening 900a is guided to the continuous rotating body 901, when a game ball enters the probable opening 900a, the game ball guided to the continuous rotating body 901 is provided. That is less. Therefore, the lottery for determining whether or not to enter the continuation opening 901a has a lower probability than the lottery for determining whether or not to enter the probability changing opening 900a.

  With this configuration, the player first enjoys the lottery as to whether or not to enter the probable opening 900a, and then determines whether a game ball that has not entered the probable opening 900a enters the continuation opening 901a. You can enjoy the lottery. Therefore, the maximum player can enjoy the two-stage lottery. In addition, since the game ball is first guided to the probable variable rotating body 900, the probable lottery can be executed with priority over the continuous lottery, and the probable change can be easily given.

  In the present embodiment, the probable rotating body 900 is arranged on the upstream side of the continuous rotating body 901, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous rotating body 901 may be arranged on the upstream side of the probable rotating body 900. In addition, the number of balls in one round to the second specific entrance 650a is five balls, but is not limited thereto, and may be one ball or less, or may be ten balls or more. You may.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the specific entrance 650a is distributed to the positive variable rotating body 900 or the continuous rotating body 901 by the rotational distribution member 800. The configuration is not limited to the sorting prize winning device 650 in which the ball can enter at the jackpot. For example, the distribution prize winning device 650 is configured to be opened even at a place other than the jackpot, and further, instead of the probability changing mouth 900a of the probability variable rotating body 900 and the continuation opening 901a of the continuous rotating body 901, it becomes a chance for a special symbol lottery. It is good also as a structure provided with a ball entrance respectively. In this case, the entrances may be entrances with different degrees of advantage (for example, different winning prize balls and different probability of change in the event of a jackpot). For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball entrance provided in the arrangement of the continuation port 901 (that is, the ball entrance on the downstream side) is more advantageous. The timing at which the distribution winning device 650 is opened may be, for example, a configuration in which it is opened when a normal symbol is hit. In this case, in one hit of the normal symbol, the opening pattern in which the slide member 670 is opened during a period in which the ball can enter the entrance located at the position of the probability changing opening 900a, and the position of the probability changing opening 900a. An opening pattern in which the slide member 670 is opened only during a period in which the ball cannot be entered (a state in which the ball can enter the downstream entrance) may be provided. That is, as the time-saving state (and the probable change state), there are provided a time-saving state in which a lottery can be executed at an advantageous entrance, and a time-saving state in which a lottery can be executed at a relatively disadvantageous entrance. Is also good.

  With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the entrance where a ball that has entered the inside of the sorting prize winning device 650 enters, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first modification of the first embodiment, effects and control similar to those in the first embodiment are performed, but the detailed description thereof is the same as that described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 650 in the first embodiment is changed (the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 650 is changed). 3 (a). The distribution prize winning device 650 according to the second modification of the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is held below the slide member 670. The difference is that a member 700 is provided. A state in which a solenoid (not shown) is operated so that the protruding portion 700 protrudes forward during the round, and the game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a is held so as not to flow downward. Become. Thereafter, at the end of the round, at the same time as the slide member 670 is slid forward, the protruding member 700 is also changed to the rear side to cause the held game balls to flow downstream. Note that a detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided above the protruding portion 700, and when the sensor is detected, a prize ball is paid out and the end of the round is completed. Be executed. Further, when the game ball is held by the protruding portion 700, even if the second specific entrance 650a is in an open state, it is prevented from entering the second specific entrance 650a by the retained game ball. Then, it flows down the upper part of the front cover body 652, and flows down below the distribution winning device 650.

  Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the sorting ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 650 as in the above-described embodiment.

  Here, in the second modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the rotation distribution member 800 is switched and rotated every 5 seconds. In addition, the positive variable rotating body 900 and the continuous rotating body 901 are similarly rotated. The interval period from the first round to the eighth round is set to 8 seconds. The maximum time required for the game ball held on the protrusion to be detected by the probability change switch or the continuation switch is 7 seconds. In this modification, a period up to 7 seconds at the end of the round is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j. Specifically, at the start of the round, a maximum round period of 15 seconds is set, and when one game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a (in a modified example, the maximum winning number per round is one), A period of 7 seconds is set in the winning detection period storage area 203j.

  With this configuration, when a game ball that has entered the second specific entrance 650a during a round game is detected by a probable change switch (not shown) or a continuation switch (not shown), it is activated. Can be determined as Therefore, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the player wins the probability change mouth 900a or the continuation mouth 901a.

  Whether the guide is guided to the right flow path 655 or the left flow path 654 according to the timing of the end of the round changes depending on the rotational position of the rotary distribution member 800, and the expectation for the probability change or continuation (16 rounds) may be changed. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the protruding portion 700 is changed to the rear side at the round end timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a timing 0.5 seconds after the round end or a plurality of times is selected by lottery. You may comprise so that it may change after time. With this configuration, the player is given a timing by which the holding by the protruding portion 700 is released, the rotation position of the rotation distributing member 800, the rotation position of the positive rotation body 900, and the rotation position of the continuous rotation body 901. Different interests can be given.

  In the second modification, the number of balls entering the second specific entrance 650a in one round is one ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of balls entering the second specific entrance 650a is three seconds per round. The game ball may be opened to let one ball enter, then closed for 8 seconds, the game ball may be allowed to flow down, a lottery may be drawn, the game ball may be opened again for 3 seconds, and the ball may be closed. . With such a configuration, a plurality of game balls can be entered in one round and the lottery can be performed a plurality of times, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Third Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 650 according to the third modification of the first embodiment. In the third modified example of the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a with respect to the second embodiment, the game ball is prevented from flowing down to the positive variable rotating body 900. In that a protruding portion 700 is provided. This protruding portion is changed by a solenoid (not shown) so as to protrude to the front side during one to eight rounds. When a game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). In the present modification, from the first round to the eighth round, the maximum opening period of the second specific entrance 650a in one round is set to 3 seconds, and the slide member is set at the timing when three game balls enter. 670 is changed to the closed position. Here, when the protruding portion 700 holds a game ball, the game ball is configured to have a size that allows up to four balls to enter the second specific entrance 650a. Therefore, if a game ball further enters before the slide member 670 is closed at the timing when three balls have entered the second specific entrance 650a, up to four balls enter the second specific entrance 650a in one round. It is configured to be sphereable.

  Further, a magnetic sensor 659 is provided in the flow path immediately below the sorting ball inlet 650a so as to detect a game ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 650a. This magnetic sensor is used to detect the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 650 as in the above-described embodiment.

  One second after the end of one round, the protruding member 700 is changed to the back side so that the game ball flows down to the positive variable rotating body 900. Here, if four game balls have entered the second specific entrance 650a, the ball will always enter the probable change opening 900a, and it is determined that the probable change is always given to the player. After that, three game balls are guided to the continuous rotating body 901, and can be made to enter the continuous opening 901 a with a probability of ／. In this modification, the maximum period until the game ball held in the protruding portion 700 is detected by the continuation switch (not shown) in the interval period from the first round to the eighth round (10 in this embodiment). Second) is set in the prize detection period storage area 203j as a prize detection period.

  Note that a command indicating the number of gaming balls that have entered the second specific entrance 650a is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and an effect based on the command is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which a display mode indicating that a certainty change is determined to be given at the timing when the fourth ball enters is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Second embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a second embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the game board 13 in the second embodiment includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guiding nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310). , And others are not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a left first winning opening 64a, a right first winning opening 64b, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device ( (Not shown), the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the left first winning opening 64a, the right first winning opening 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13 and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first left winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first left winning opening 64a, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has won the first right winning opening 64b, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a winning in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot types determined here, "big jackpot B (16R probability variable lottery hit)" and "big hit C (16R probability variable big hit)" are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the "big hit B" means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and that the game ball is controlled to be able to pass through the certain change switch 65e3 during the big hit game, and the certain change game state is given after the big hit game. The set jackpot. On the other hand, the “big hit C” is a big hit game in which the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game. Therefore, the jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time-saving game state is mainly given after the jackpot game.

  Further, the “probable change game state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that easily transitions to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later is increased and a ball easily wins the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, and the left first winning opening is obtained. This refers to a game state in which a ball can easily enter the 64a or the right first winning port 64b. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessories 645a and 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b are opened is changed. The time is set longer than normal. The left first winning opening 64a when the electric accessory 645a, 645b is in an open state (open state) is different from the case where the electric accessory 645a, 645b is in a closed state (closed state). Alternatively, the ball easily enters the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball easily enters the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, or changing the opening time. In addition to the above, a change may be made such that the number of times the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened at one time is increased from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during the shortened working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time during which the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is opened and 1 At least one of the number of times that the electric accessory 645a, 645b is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during probable changes or during working hours, the time during which the electric auditors 645a and 645b associated with the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is opened, and the electric auditors 645a and 645b each time. The number of times of releasing the symbol may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal symbol.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to generate the third display. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown). Further, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 10), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  The pachinko machine 10 attaches to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”). The driven electric members 645a and 645b are configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors 645a and 645b of the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b.

  In addition, the left first prize during probable change or during working hours, such as increasing the probability of hitting during probable changes or during working hours, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 645a, 645b per hit. In the case where the ball easily enters the mouth 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 645a, 645b may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a distribution winning port 64 is arranged. Here, the details of the distribution winning port 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) and (b) are front views of the distribution winning opening 64 with the front cover body 64c removed, and FIG. 41 (a) shows a game board in the left and right direction above the distribution winning opening 64. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view cut from above and viewed from above. FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line IVb in FIG. 41A.

  The distribution winning port 64 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13 by a router, and is fixed to the game board 13 from the front side with screws. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), a detachable front cover body is disposed on the front side of the distribution winning opening 64. Locking pieces 64d and 64e are provided on the left and right of the front cover body 64c, and claw portions projecting outward are formed at the tips of the locking pieces 64d and 64e. By fitting the front cover body 64c from the front side of the distribution winning opening 64, the claw portions of the locking pieces 64d and 64e engage with the engagement walls 64g and 64h of the base body 641 of the distribution winning opening 64. As a result, the front cover 64c is fixed to the distribution winning opening 64. When the front cover body 64c is pulled forward, the engagement between the claws of the locking pieces 64d and 64e and the engaging walls 64g and 64h is released, and the front cover body 64c can be separated from the winning opening 64. it can.

  The front cover 64c is made of a transparent resin, and has a spiral pattern formed on the front surface. With this pattern, the inside of the distribution winning opening 64 looks distorted through the front cover body 64c, and it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the winning opening 64.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the base body 641 for fixing the distribution winning opening 64 to the game board 13 has an opening 64i in which a game ball can be inserted, and the opening 64i is formed in the upper part. The left first prize hole 64a on the left and the right first prize hole 64b on the right side connect the inner wall portion, and the connecting portion 64j forms Is formed. The connecting portion 64j is formed in a convex shape protruding upward, and is configured to regulate movement of the game ball to the other entrance.

  Each of the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b has an inclined surface which receives a game ball entered from the opening 64i and flows down to the back side of the game board 13. . As shown in FIG. 41 (a), a left downflow gutter member 64t and a right downflow gutter member 64u are arranged on the back side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the left downflow gutter 64t is arranged such that a game ball entering the first left winning opening 64a flows down below the game board 13 on the back side of the game board 13. . The left downflow gutter 64t is provided with a detection switch 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball, and detects that the game ball has entered the first left winning opening 64a.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the game ball entering the right first winning port 64b flows down to the rear side of the game board 13, the right downspout gutter 64u flows down below the game board 13. It is arranged to be. The right downspout 64u is provided with a detection switch 64s2 capable of detecting a game ball, and detects that the game ball has entered the right first winning opening 64b.

  The distribution adjustment of the distribution prize device 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which gaming balls are set to be easily distributed to the left first winning opening 64a, and FIG. 40 (b) is a region in which gaming balls are easily distributed to the right first winning opening 64b. It is a figure showing the state where it set up.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and (b), the game nails are arranged on the upper side of the opening 64i formed in the base body 641 of the sorting and winning device 64c so that the game nails can pass left and right by one game ball. Thus, a passage port 645 is formed. The passage 645 has a passage formed around the vertex of the connecting portion 64j. Of the gaming nails forming the passage opening 645, the adjusting nails t1 and t2 closest to the base body 641 adjust the ratio at which the game balls are distributed to the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. Is set to As shown in FIG. 40 (a), by adjusting the gaming nail t2 so as to be inclined downward, the width of the opening w2 is narrowed at the right first winning opening 64b, and a game ball is positioned at the left first winning opening 64a. It is set to be easily sorted. Here, by adjusting the width of the opening w2 to be smaller than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, the game ball can be distributed only to the left first winning opening 64a.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the ratio of the game balls distributed to the right first winning opening 64b by inclining the gaming nail t1 downward to narrow the width of the opening w1 of the left first winning opening 64a. Can be set many. Also, by adjusting the width of the opening w1 to be smaller than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball, it is possible to adjust the game ball to be distributed only to the right first winning opening 64b.

  Here, in a state where the front cover body 64c is attached to the sorting and winning device 64, the front cover body 64 covers the adjusting nails t1 and t2 from the front side as shown in FIG. In addition, it is difficult to identify the adjustment condition of the nail. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the distribution adjustment of the distribution prize device 64. The surface of the front cover body 64c facing the adjusting nails t1 and t2 is formed in a concave shape so as to prevent interference.

  Electric passing objects 645a and 645b are arranged in the passage opening 645, and when the electric actors 645a and 645b operate and the blades are opened outward, game balls are guided to the passing opening 645. Easy to configure.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can recognize the passage 645 formed in the upper part of the sorting and winning device 64 as a ball entrance and play a game such that a game ball is entered. Also, when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a, one prize ball is paid out to the player. In addition, the setting is made such that when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b, three prize balls are paid out to the player (see FIG. 46 (b)). Therefore, the gaming store side can variably adjust the number of prize balls paid out to the player by changing the ratio of distributing the game balls to the left first prize port 64a and the right first prize port 64b. Therefore, by adjusting the adjusting nails t1 and t2, the gaming shop can easily adjust the profit and the like. In this case, the profit can be adjusted without changing the ball entry rate to the passage opening 645, and the player can be made to play a game with a setting in which more game balls are allowed to be distributed to the winning opening 64.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b, a lottery of a special symbol is executed, and a variation display of the third symbol showing the lottery result is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is executed at 81. Therefore, the player can play a game while maintaining a chance to win a special symbol lottery. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

  When a ball wins in the left first winning opening 64a, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 10), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a right first winning opening 64b in which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the left first winning opening 64a in a front view. When a ball wins in the right first winning opening 64b, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 10), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b by the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the sorting winning device 64. It is not limited. For example, in place of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unclosed winning port. In this case, the switching valve may be configured so that a winning port closed by the hall can be set, may be switched at random, or configured so that the winning port closed at regular intervals is switched. Is also good. Further, it may be configured such that each time a symbol is hit, the pattern is switched in a predetermined operation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the left first winning port 64a, which normally receives few prize balls, is opened (the right first winning port 64b is closed by the switching valve) and a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined A configuration in which the right first winning port 64b is opened (the left first winning port 64a is closed by the switching valve) during a period (for example, a period of time when the electric bonus products 645a and 645b are opened). It may be. Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period (for example, 1.5 seconds) after the hit, and the right first winning opening is set 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds later. The configuration may be such that the left first winning opening 64a is set to the opened state again after 4.5 seconds, and after 4.5 seconds. Then, a variation may be provided in the opening pattern (the type of the time reduction state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b when a normal symbol is hit. That is, the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) of the pattern in which the motor-operated objects 645a and 645b are opened during the period in which the first left winning opening 64a is opened, and the motorized state during the period in which the right first winning opening 64b is opened. The time saving state (time saving state 2) of the pattern in which the accessories 645a and 645b are opened may be provided.

  In addition, instead of providing the left first prize port 64a and the right first prize port 64b, different lotteries are executed (for example, a different jackpot type is determined when a jackpot occurs). A configuration may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that a winning port that can enter the ball can be switched. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a winning port with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a large jackpot with a large number of prize balls is easily determined. By providing a winning opening having a different degree of advantage when the lottery is executed, a game can be played with a strong expectation that the ball will win the advantageous winning opening. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, what is provided in the distribution winning device 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different portion on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a state where a ball can be entered or a state where a ball cannot be entered. (A so-called non-motorized accessory) may be provided. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball is thrown into any one of the working ports (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be thrown) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

  At the lower left of the game board 13, a first variable prize device 65 is disposed, and a jackpot lottery performed due to a prize at the left first prize port 64a or the right first prize port 64b is determined as a big win. Then, a predetermined dynamic display is executed on the first symbol display device 37A, the first symbol display device 37B, and the third symbol display device 81, thereby indicating occurrence of a big hit. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) in which a ball can easily be won in the first variable winning device 65. In this special game state, the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The first variable winning device 65 is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first variable winning device 65 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Specifically, the details of the first variable winning device 65 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 42, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a first variable winning device. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13; and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for holding the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and opening and closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked by the switching member 65h, and a switching member 65i disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operating the link member 65i, and covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side with screws on the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 in a La cross section (see FIG. 43 (b)). FIG. 43C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 43B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the first variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided to the left in FIG. 43 (b). A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 43 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can enter and exit from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. It is changed to a closed state in which it is possible (hard to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper portion of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning opening 65 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during a time-saving game (including during a probability change game), it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b while right-hitting, and after the big hit game It is possible to reduce the trouble of immediately changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 43A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described below. .

  FIG. 44 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover 65g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. You. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is configured by a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is done.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability game state (the probability change state) by the passing of the game ball through the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. (Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a certain-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the first variable winning opening 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. Can be. The minimum time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. I have. The operation timing and operation time of the operation of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds at the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the thirteenth round. When the big hit C is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the thirteenth round.

  Therefore, at the big hit B, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the positive change switch 65e3, but at the big hit C, it is impossible to pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Have been. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability change giving ratio depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure so as not to cause excessive advantage and disadvantage.

  With reference to FIG. 44 (b), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game ball won before the thirteenth round is won in the thirteenth round in a state where the gaming ball has not been ejected, and even if it is a big hit C, the winning in the probability change switch 65e3.

  In this manner, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball is given to the player as a privilege (in the present embodiment, one ball is won). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are different. Are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment.

  The ROM 202 according to the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment in that the content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed and that the content of the prize ball table 202e is added. Are identical.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 46A) is set so that the big hit B and the big hit C can be selected. Specifically, the value "0-29" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the jackpot B determination value, and "30-99" is set as the jackpot C determination value.

  Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is configured so that the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not the game ball is in the probability change state). Is executed), but it is configured such that it is impossible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the "big hit C" (that is, the lottery to determine whether or not to be in the probability change state is not performed). The "big hit B" is more advantageous for the player than the big hit.

  Next, the contents of the award ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. In the prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46 (b)), game balls enter the above-mentioned prize ports (general prize port 63, left first prize port 64a, right first prize port 64b, specific prize port 65a). It is a table that defines the number of game balls to be paid out in the event that a game ball is paid out. The prize ball table 202e is referred to for calculating the number of prize balls, which is the number of payout game balls, based on the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 48). A prize ball command is generated based on the calculated prize ball number, and transmitted to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. When the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 receives the winning ball command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out the number of winning balls according to the received command.

  Specifically, one ball is defined as the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a, and 3 is set as a payout ball when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b. Balls are defined, 10 balls are defined as the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 640, and 5 balls are defined as a number of payout balls when a game ball enters the normal winning opening 63. ing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b is set to be larger than the left first winning opening 64a. As a result, when a large number of game balls passing through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b, it is advantageous for the player, and otherwise, disadvantageous for the player.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball having passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. Have been. This makes it possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage 645 win a large amount in the right first winning opening 64b, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 45B, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. , Counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203r, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passing counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, operation counter 203t3, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5, probability variation valid flag 203t6, probability variation It has at least a valid timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a medium time counter 203u, an opening flag 203v, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area), and each of these areas has a left first winning opening. The respective values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is obtained, and the obtained data is Of the vacant areas among the four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant areas of the (area), the areas are sequentially stored in ascending order of the area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the order of winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is a first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball (start winning) in the first left winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) in the variable display of the symbol (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and a ball enters the first left winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b to increase the number of reserved balls in the variable display. Every time, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S504 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S204 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 17 and S505 in FIG. 20). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is configured to display the number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the ordinary starting port 67. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of retained balls in the fluctuation display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S804 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S705 in FIG. 22).

  If the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of changing display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. Then, the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 23). : No).

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used to hold each counter value, as in the first embodiment described above.

  The big hit flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit game is being executed. The big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S2503 in FIG. 51) in the big hit setting processing (S233), which is executed when a big hit is made in the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 17), and is executed at the end of the big hit. In the ending process (FIG. 55) performed, it is set to OFF (S2702 in FIG. 55).

  The probability change flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state (probability change game state). When the certainty change flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the certainty change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the game state is the low probability game state (including the time saving game state). In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203s described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203r is set to ON (see S2704 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probable change game state is determined by whether or not a game ball has passed the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 44A) during the jackpot game. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812 in FIG. 56). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the probability change flag 203r is set to on. Note that the probability change setting flag 203s is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 203s is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. 203s may be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the power has passed through the certainty switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable counter 203t1 described later has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by judging whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203s while the power is off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203t1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203t1 and the ejection number counter 203t8 described later. The probability variable passage counter 203t1 is incremented and updated by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed (S2811 in FIG. 56). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S2911 in FIG. 57). It is to be noted that this variable passage counter 203t1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203t2 is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 42) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is incremented by one and updated (see FIG. 56). S2803). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning in the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203t2) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203t8 and the positive variable passing counter 203t1) Are determined to match, and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203t2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203t3 is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present pachinko machine 10, at the big hit B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and at the big hit C, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the operation counter 203t3, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round in the big hit B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit C (S2602 in FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the process of S2809 of the winning process (S1341 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203t3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203t3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65e3 according to the type of big hit.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 to ON, the remaining ball timer 203t5 described later is added and updated one by one (see S2905 in FIG. 57). The remaining ball timer 203t5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to perform.

  The remaining ball timer 203t5 determines that when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed, the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 is discharged. Is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the operation has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer 203t5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203t5, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. (S2907 in FIG. 57). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game balls are left illegally in the first variable prize device 65, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the thirteenth round, so that the game balls reach the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball to the probable change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a dedicated flag is set on. If the flag is on, the probable change setting flag 203s is set even if the game ball passes the probable change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper provision of the certain game state.

  The probability change enable flag 203t6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the certain variation enable flag 203t6 is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 44 (a)) is switched based on the fact that the channel solenoid 65k is ON. 65e3 or less. That is, this indicates that the game ball passes through the certainty changing switch 65e3 during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203t7 is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203t6 was set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203t7 turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period required to normally pass the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203t7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. After that, even if the value passes through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not to be passed.

  With this, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge channel 65e2, the switching member 65h is caused to enter the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass a game ball through the positive variable switch 65e3, or to connect a piano wire or the like from below the positive variable switch 65e3. , It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up the game ball and causing it to pass, or erroneously detecting a magnetic sensor as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203t8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 44A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203t8 is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S2911 in FIG. 57).

  The time reduction counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction game state. If the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203u. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

  The opening flag 203v is a flag indicating whether a jackpot has occurred. This opening flag 203v is set to ON in the big hit setting process (FIG. 51), which is executed when a big hit is made in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) (S2504 in FIG. 51), and the big hit control process 2 When the opening command is set in (FIG. 53), it is set to OFF (S1332 in FIG. 53).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is deleted, The difference is that a counter 223f is added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223e is a counter used for a notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the special symbol change process (S104) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12). Instead of executing the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 49), the gate control process (S1104) is not executed in the main process (see FIG. 22), and instead of the big hit control process (S1105). The difference is that the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Timer interrupt processing 2 is a periodic processing executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process 2, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). For example, information on a ball entering the left first winning port 64a and a ball entering the right first winning port 64b are stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process 2 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). . Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b (S105). In the start winning process (S105), since only the process relating to the special symbol 2 is not performed in the first embodiment, detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  When the process of S105 is completed, the processes of S106 to S109 are executed as in the first embodiment, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If the ball is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S231). Next, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). ).

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process 2 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The details of the special symbol 1 change start process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S217) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process is executed, a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of the first special symbol big hit, it is determined whether the big hit B or the big hit C according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit B occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit C occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is displayed. It is determined whether it is a symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot setting process is executed (S233), and the process proceeds to S222. The details of the jackpot setting process (S233) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 0 (S234). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the value of the counter 203u during time saving is decremented by 1 (S234), and the process proceeds to S235. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203u is 0 (S234: No), the process of S235 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222 executed after the process of S233, S234 or S235, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S216 and the activation of the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S222). When the process of S222 ends, the present process ends.

  Next, the special symbol 1 change start process 2 (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process 2 (S213). The special symbol 1 change start process 2 (S213) in the second embodiment is different in that the process of S331 is executed instead of the process of S302 of the first embodiment, and the other points are the same. .

  Specifically, in the process of S302 in the first embodiment, it is determined whether the probability change counter 203g is greater than 0, thereby determining whether the probability change is being performed. On the other hand, in the process of S331 in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the probability change is being performed by determining whether the probability change flag 203r is ON.

  In the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203r is ON (that is, when it is determined that the probability change is being performed) (S331: Yes), the process of S303 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. Execute and end this processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203r is off (that is, when it is determined that the probability is not being changed) (S331: No), the process of S304 is executed, and the processes of S305 to S311 are performed. And terminate the present process.

  Next, the jackpot setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process (S233). The big hit setting process (S233) is a process that is executed in the special symbol changing process 2 (see FIG. 49) to make settings for starting a big hit game.

  In the jackpot setting process, first, the jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S2501), and based on the determined jackpot type, an opening scenario of the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k. Is set (S2502). More specifically, in the case of the jackpot type A, in the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, the opening of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set so that the game ball passes through the variable switch 65e3. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit C, the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set so as not to be opened (the game ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3).

  Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S2503), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S2504), and the process ends.

  Next, a main process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing 2. In the main processing 2, main processing of the game is executed.

  In the main process 2, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices ( An external output process to be transmitted to the peripheral control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 48). If there is winning detection information, the payout control device is determined based on the prize ball table 202e. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls is transmitted to 111. In addition, as in the first embodiment, a command for the number of balls to be held, a variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, a stop type command, and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102), and the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). The execution of the effect and the jackpot control process 2 for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 are executed (S1105). Details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S1105 is completed, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 645a, 645b associated with the passage 645 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, the processes of S1107 to S1116 are executed and the process ends, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1104). The jackpot control process 2 (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 52). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed or specified. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the opening flag 203v is on (S1331). In the process of S1331, if it is determined that the opening flag 203v is on (S1331: Yes), the opening flag 203v is turned off (S1332), an opening command is set (S1333), and the process ends. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if the opening flag 203v is not on (S1331: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301). The jackpot flag 203i is turned on when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and when the special symbol jackpot is being played. During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. In the process of S1301, if the big hit flag 203i is not on (S1301: No), the special symbol is not in the big hit, so this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1334). If it is determined in the process of S1334 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1334), a jackpot operation setting process (S1335), which is a process for setting to start a new round, is executed. The process ends.

  Here, in the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 54, S1335), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2601). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S2601 (S2602). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the processing of S2601 (S2603). After that, this processing ends.

  In this manner, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1334, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1334: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k (S1336). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1336: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1337). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1338). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1336 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1336: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1339). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined. If it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1339: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1340). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1340) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1340 in FIG. 55). In the ending processing (FIG. 55, S1340), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S2701). Next, the jackpot flag is set to off (S2702), and it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203s is on (S2703). If it is determined in the processing of S2703 that the probability change setting flag 203s is ON (S2703: Yes), the probability change flag 203r is set to ON (S2704). Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203s is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203r being set to on. After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203s is not on (S2703: No), the time reduction counter is set to 100, and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203s is on, and if it is on, the probable change flag 203r is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed the certainty switch 65e3 and set the certainty change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether the game ball passes to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game is determined. Play games with interest.

  In the present embodiment, the time-saving game state is given 100 times when the certainty-variable game state is not set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state may be given 50 times or 150 times. The time-saving game state may be given 100 times together with the game state.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1339, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1339: No), the winning processing is executed (S1341). Here, the winning process (S1341) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1341).

  In the winning process (S1341 in FIG. 56), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S2801). The round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S2801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed (S2802: Yes), the winning counter 203t2 is updated by adding 1 (S2803). After that, the processing of S2804 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S2802: No), the process of S2804 is executed.

  In the processing of S2804, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is 10 or more (S2804: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2806). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to ON (S2807). After that, the processing of S2808 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball has been thrown since the door 65f1 was closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2804 that the value of the winning number counter 203t2 is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2805). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2805: Yes), the processing of S2806 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2805: No), the process of S2808 is executed.

  In the process of S2808, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203t3 is greater than 0 (S2808). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203t3 is larger than 0 (S2808: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203t3 is updated by subtracting -1 (S2809). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the certainty changing switch 65e3 (S2810). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the certain-variable passing switch 65e3 (S2810: Yes), the value of the certain-variable passing counter 203t1 is incremented by 1 and updated (S2811). The variable probability setting flag 203s is set to ON (S2812). After that, the process of S2813 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2810 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch 65e3 (S2810: No), the processing of S2813 is executed. In the processing of S2813, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2813). If it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S2814). The probable change valid flag 203t6 is set to ON (S2815). After that, this processing ends. Here, by setting the probability change valid flag 203t6 to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability change game is performed. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2808, when it is determined that the operation counter 203t3 is 0 (S2808: No), it is determined whether the probability change valid flag 203t6 is on (S2816). If the probable change valid flag 203t6 is off (S2816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change enable flag 203t6 is ON (S2816: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the probability change enable timer 203t7 (S2817). It is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S2818). If it is determined that the probable variable valid timer 203t7 is at the upper limit (S2818: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203t6 is set to off (S2819), and the probable variable valid timer 203t7 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2820). . After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2818 that the probability change valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value (S2818: No), the processing of S2810 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203t7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the ball elapse time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the game ball is passed through the probable change switch 65e3 and the probable game state is given.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1341 in FIG. 56) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1342). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1342) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormal processing (S1342). In the abnormal process (S1342), a process of monitoring whether a game ball is illegally passed through the probable change switch 65e3 is executed.

  In the abnormal process (FIG. 57, S1342), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round valid period (S2901). If it is out of the round validity period (S2901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S2901: Yes), it is determined whether a game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S2902: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203p is updated by adding 1 (S2903). After that, the process of S2904 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S2902: No), the process of S2904 is executed.

  In the process of S2904, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is on (S2904). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is off (S2904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is ON (S2904: Yes), the ball is being thrown out, and the remaining ball timer 203t5 is updated by adding 1 (S2905). The remaining ball timer 203t5 determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S2906). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S2906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S2906: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203t1 and the number of discharged pieces counter 203t8) matches the number of winning pieces (the value of the winning number counter 203t2). It is determined whether it is (S2907).

  If it is determined that they match (S2907: Yes), the processing of S2909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2907: No), an error command is set (S2908). After that, the processing of S2909 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, and to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball to the certainty change switch 65e3 even in the case of the big hit C.

  In the processing of S2909, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4 is set to OFF (S2909), and the remaining ball timer 203t5 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2910). After that, the winning number counter 203t2, the discharge number counter 203t8, and the variable probability passing counter 203t1 are reset to the initial values, respectively (S2911), and thereafter, this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, a command determination process 2 (S1611) is replaced with the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The difference is that it is changed to be executed, and the other points are the same.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the command determination process 2 (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1611). The command determination process 2 (S1611) is executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, receives the command received from the main control device 110. judge. In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1708 are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, in the processing of S1707, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1707: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1731). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1732). It returns to main processing 2. In the process of S1732, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area for the first special symbol is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1731 (S1731: No), then it is determined whether or not a command relating to the jackpot has been received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Here, the command relating to the jackpot includes, for example, an opening command, a round number command, an ending command, and the like.

  In the process of S1711, when a command related to the jackpot is received, a process corresponding to the command is executed (S1712), and the process returns to the main process 2. More specifically, for example, when the received command is an opening command, a display opening command is set. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts a big hit effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1711 that a command relating to the jackpot has not been received (S1711: No), it is determined whether an error command has been received (S1733). If it is determined in step S1733 that an error command has been received, error processing corresponding to the command is performed (S1734), and the process returns to main processing 2.

  Specifically, the process of S1734 extracts an error type from the received error command, and sets a display error command based on the error type. Thus, the occurrence of the error can be notified to the display control device 114 together with the type of the error. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, when a winning number mismatch error occurs in the main control device, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and notifies the display control device 114 to display an error (for example, a winning number mismatch error). Characters are displayed) and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Thereby, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the first variable winning device 65, and to suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the certainty change switch 65e3 even if the big hit C occurs.

  In the process of S1734, when it is determined that an error command has not been received (S1734: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1719), and returns to the main processing 2. The process of S1719 is, for example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and a command used by the display control device 114 is used. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, the profit is adjusted by the gaming shop adjusting the winning rate of the entrance where the special symbol is drawn. With such a configuration, there is a problem that the number of special symbol lottery opportunities decreases, a period during which the special symbol does not fluctuate, and the like, and a problem that the player's willingness to play is attenuated. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has passed through the passing port 645 enters the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b, and the jackpot is drawn. Done. The prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 46B) is set in the left first prize port 64a and the right first prize port 64b so that the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball enters is different. ing. Specifically, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a is one ball, whereas the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the right first winning opening 64b. Has three balls. Therefore, if a large number of game balls passing through the passage opening 645 win the right first winning opening 64b, it is advantageous for the player, while if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball having passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the right first winning port 64b. Have been. This makes it possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage 645 win a large amount in the right first winning opening 64b, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. In addition, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player by the adjustment nails t1 and t2 (the number of prize balls for game balls passing through the passage 645) can be changed, the ball entry rate passing through the passage 645 is adjusted. There is no necessity, and it is possible to easily configure the distribution prize device 64 to win a game ball. Therefore, for the gaming shop, even if the gaming balls are set to win a lot in the distribution prize device 64, profits can be secured by suppressing the number of paid-out prize balls. In addition, the player has a lot of chances for a special symbol to be drawn by lot, thereby suppressing a problem of getting tired of the game.

  A front cover 64c is provided in front of the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b. The front cover may be formed of an opaque member or a pattern may be provided on the front. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the game ball that has passed through the passage 645 has entered the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. good. In this way, when a large number of game balls passing through the passage 645 win the left first winning opening 64a, the player visually recognizes it and wins a lot of the left first winning opening 64a (that is, for the player). By feeling that the adjustment is made to be disadvantageous), feeling of dissatisfaction or the like can be reduced.

  Further, the position of the adjustment nails t1 and t2 may be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by forming the front cover body with an opaque member or adding a pattern to the front part. Thereby, the player visually recognizes the positions of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, and feels that the player has been adjusted so as to win a large amount in the first left winning opening 64a (that is, disadvantageous to the player). Feeling can be reduced.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage 645 to the first left winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is calculated and displayed. Specifically, a game ball that has passed through the passage opening 645 is detected by a sensor or the like, and the ball enters the first left winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b until the number of passed game balls reaches 100. The number of game balls is stored. Thereafter, when the number of passed game balls reaches 100, the number of stored game balls is displayed, and the stored information is cleared. Here, the above-described display indicating the ball entry ratio may be provided, for example, by providing a switch on the back side of the gaming machine and displaying the switch only when the switch is on. In this way, when adjusting the ball entry ratio at the store, by displaying and adjusting the ball entry ratio, it is possible to easily adjust the ball entry ratio, while turning off the switch for the player. By doing so, the entry ratio can be prevented from being displayed, and the adjusted entry ratio can not be known.

  It should be noted that the number of gaming balls passing through the passage 645 is not detected, but only the number of gaming balls entering the first left winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b is detected. The above processing may be executed when 100 balls are reached. This eliminates the need for a sensor at the passage 645, thereby reducing the cost of the gaming machine. Further, the calculation timing of the above-mentioned ball entry ratio is not limited to every 100 balls, but may be every 300 balls, every 50 balls, or may be calculated every predetermined time.

  In addition, as described above, when a new special symbol jackpot is obtained while the “normal symbol time reduction state” is continued, each time the special symbol jackpot type is changed according to the new special symbol jackpot type (“ The duration of the "normal design time-saving state" is updated, so if the special symbol jackpot becomes new during the "normal design time-saving state" duration, the normal symbol remaining until the new jackpot becomes Time savings are invalidated. For example, when "special symbol jackpot B" is reached and "normal symbol normal state" is shifted to "normal symbol time reduction state", the special symbol lottery is completed after the "big jackpot B" ends. It will be continued until it ends. However, immediately after that, if it becomes "special symbol jackpot B" again, the time saving period up to that point will be invalidated, and "normal state of ordinary symbol" will be 100 times of special symbol lottery after the end of "big jackpot B" It will continue until it ends.

  In addition, the motor-operated objects 645a and 645b are arranged so that game balls can easily enter the passage 645. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Game balls are provided only in the first left winning opening 64a and only in the first right winning opening 64b. You may comprise so that guidance may be made easy. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entry port 64a or the right first winning port 64b of the base body 64c is constituted by rotating vanes (electrically-operated objects), and the game ball is rotated by rotating. May be configured to easily enter the left first ball entry port 64a or the right first ball entry port 64b. By adopting such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, it is possible to pay out a large number of game balls during working hours or during probable changes, thereby reducing the number of balls held by the player. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for shifting to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to either the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b by the adjusting nails t1 and t2 provided in the sorting winning device 64. It is not limited. For example, in place of the adjusting nails t1 and t2, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning opening distributed by a switching valve movable by a solenoid or the like is switched. That is, one of the left first winning port 64a and the right first winning port 64b may be closed by the switching valve, and the ball may flow down to the other unclosed winning port. In this case, the switching valve may be configured so that a winning port closed by the hall can be set, may be switched at random, or configured so that the winning port closed at regular intervals is switched. Is also good. Further, it may be configured such that each time a symbol is hit, the pattern is switched in a predetermined operation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the left first winning port 64a, which normally receives few prize balls, is opened (the right first winning port 64b is closed by the switching valve) and a normal symbol is hit, a predetermined A configuration in which the right first winning port 64b is opened (the left first winning port 64a is closed by the switching valve) during a period (for example, a period of time when the electric bonus products 645a and 645b are opened). It may be. Further, the switching valve may be configured to execute a certain operation each time a normal symbol is hit. For example, the left first winning opening 64b is set to be open for a certain period (for example, 1.5 seconds) after the hit, and the right first winning opening is set 1.5 seconds to 4.5 seconds later. The configuration may be such that the left first winning opening 64a is set to the opened state again after 4.5 seconds, and after 4.5 seconds. Then, a variation may be provided in the opening pattern (the type of the time reduction state) of the electric accessory 645a, 645b when a normal symbol is hit. That is, the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) of the pattern in which the motor-operated objects 645a and 645b are opened during the period in which the first left winning opening 64a is opened, and the motorized state during the period in which the right first winning opening 64b is opened. The time saving state (time saving state 2) of the pattern in which the accessories 645a and 645b are opened may be provided.

  In addition, instead of providing the left first prize port 64a and the right first prize port 64b, different lotteries are executed (for example, a different jackpot type is determined when a jackpot occurs). A configuration may be provided. Then, it may be configured such that a winning port that can enter the ball can be switched. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a winning port with a small number of prize balls is easily determined and a large jackpot with a large number of prize balls is easily determined. By providing a winning opening having a different degree of advantage when the lottery is executed, a game can be played with a strong expectation that the ball will win the advantageous winning opening. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, what is provided in the distribution winning device 64 is not limited to the winning opening. For example, each winning port is provided in a different portion on the game board, and a plurality of operating ports for switching each winning port into a state where a ball can be entered or a state where a ball cannot be entered. (A so-called non-motorized accessory) may be provided. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball is thrown into any one of the working ports (which winning port is switched to a state in which the ball can be thrown) is switched by a nail, a switching valve or the like.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, the game ball that has passed through the passage 645 enters one of the left first winning opening 64a and the right first winning opening 64b having different numbers of payout balls based on the entering ball. Ball. The gaming machine that can adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player by adjusting the ball entry ratio with the adjusting nails t1 and t2 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the passing port 645 is connected to one of the left first prize port 64a and the second prize port 640, which are different in the number of balls to be paid out when the jackpot is won. A gaming machine in which a game ball that has passed through is entered will be described.

  Here, a lottery of a first special symbol is performed based on a game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a, and a second special symbol is determined based on a game ball entering the second winning port 640. Lottery will be held. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are set so that the ratio of the jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is different. The jackpot based on the second special symbol is set so that the player can select a jackpot type that is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot based on the first special symbol.

  In addition, the number of payout balls based on the winning is configured such that the number of the second winning ports 640 is larger than the number of the first winning port 64a on the left, as in the second embodiment. As a result, in the third embodiment, the adjustment of whether or not it is advantageous for the player can be adjusted with more strength than in the second embodiment.

  Further, in the third embodiment, a reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (four in the present embodiment) is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. And the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is more than 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction. In the above-described first embodiment, a reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is greater than a predetermined value (four in the present embodiment) may be displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  The third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the display of the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the second winning opening is replaced with the right first winning opening 64b. 640 is provided. Further, the difference is that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a view showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the gaming board 13 is provided with a second winning port 640 instead of the right first winning port 64b. The second winning opening 640 has the same structure as the right first winning opening 64b in the second embodiment, but a lottery of the second special symbol is performed based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640. The jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol are different in the selection ratio of the jackpot type, and the expected value of the number of balls to be paid out to the player is different. Details will be described later.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 60A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 60B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  In the present embodiment, a small area Ds4 is provided at the upper right of the screen in addition to the display areas in the above-described second embodiment. The small area Ds4 is for displaying identification information that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of held balls (see FIG. 60 (b)), and is small until the number of held balls reaches a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment). A reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed only in the area Ds1, and when the number of reserved balls increases further than that, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls that is larger than the predetermined value and which is difficult for the player to recognize is displayed. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four or less, one reserved symbol is displayed per small ball Ds1 in the small area Ds1, and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. You. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the number of the reserved balls by counting the number of reserved symbols.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls increases from four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 and the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds4 is recognized by the player. Difficult holding symbols are displayed. More specifically, "A" indicates that the number of the reserved balls is one (that is, the number of the reserved balls is five), and that the number of the reserved balls is two (the number of the reserved balls is six). In the case of "B", the number of retained balls is 3 (i.e., the number of retained balls is 7), "C" if the number of retained balls is 4 (i.e., the number of retained balls is 8). "D" in the case of a ball. Thus, since only the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 can be easily recognized, it is possible to give the player an illusion that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. And the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is more than 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  In the present embodiment, the small area Ds4 is a display area smaller than other display areas (for example, the small area Ds1). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of reserved balls based on only the reserved symbols in the small area Ds1, which is a display area larger than the small area Ds4. Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. And the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is more than 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  It should be noted that the reserved symbol that is difficult for the player to display in the small area Ds4 is not limited to this, and may be displayed with other symbols or symbols.

  Next, the display (change) timing of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to display a stop symbol indicating a continuation display indicating that the variable effect is continuously executed when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (4 in the present embodiment). I have. As a result, the difference between the number of reserved balls recognized by the player and the actual number of reserved balls can be eliminated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a description will be given of a case where the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value during a period in which the stop type of the variable period can be replaced. FIG. 61 shows the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the small area Ds1 when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value in the period in which the stop type of the fluctuation period is replaceable. It is a timing chart showing a relationship between a reserved symbol and a reserved symbol displayed in a small area Ds4.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the variable effect is being executed, and if the game ball newly enters the left first prize port 64a or the second prize port 640 during the replaceable period of the stop symbol of the variable effect, it is held. The number of balls becomes five. Thereby, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “−” to “A”, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed is changed to one that suggests the continuation of the variable effect (see FIG. 62A). . As a result, when the fluctuation effect ends, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display indicating that the fluctuation effect is continuously executed is displayed (see FIG. 62 (b)). Then, the fluctuation effect is started, and the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “A” to “−”, and the actual number of reserved balls becomes four (FIG. 62 (c)).

  This allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuously executed by displaying the stop symbol of the continuous display, and the next variable effect is started without using the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual reserved balls are not disturbed by the player. The number of balls can be reduced from five to four, and a floating effect can be started.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. As described above, FIG. 62 (a) shows an example of a display screen when a new game ball enters the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during a period in which a variable effect stop symbol can be replaced. FIG. 62B is an example of a display screen when a continuation display indicating the continuation of the variable effect is displayed, which is stopped and displayed after FIG. 62A, and FIG. 62 is an example of a display screen when a variable effect is executed after FIG. 62 (b).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, a description will be given of a case where the number of reserved balls becomes larger than a predetermined value in a period where the stop type of the fluctuation period is not replaceable. FIG. 63 shows the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the small area Ds1 when the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value in a period in which the stop type of the fluctuation period is not replaceable. 13 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a reserved symbol that is displayed and a reserved symbol that is displayed in a small area Ds4.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and "-" is displayed in the small area Ds4. In this case, it is assumed that the variable effect is being executed, and when the game ball newly enters the left first prize port 64a or the second prize port 640 during the non-replaceable period of the stop symbol of the variable effect, The number of reserved balls becomes five. Accordingly, the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “−” to “A”, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the next variable effect is changed to a continuous display that indicates the continuation of the variable effect. One is added to the stop type change counter. As a result, the stop type of the next variable effect after the variable effect is changed to the continuous display when received from main controller 110, and the stop type change counter described above is decremented by one. As a result, in the next variable effect, a stop symbol indicating a continuous display indicating that the variable effect is continuously performed is displayed (see FIG. 64B). Then, the fluctuation effect is started, and the display of the small area Ds4 is changed from “A” to “−”, and the actual number of reserved balls becomes four (FIG. 64 (c)).

  In this way, even if the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is in the non-replaceable period, the stop symbol of the variable effect to be executed next is continuously displayed by displaying the stop symbol, so that the variable effect is continued. This allows the player to recognize that the execution is performed and the next variable effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual reserved balls are not disturbed by the player. The number of balls can be reduced from five to four, and a floating effect can be started.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202, and FIG. 65 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203.

  First, regarding the ROM 202, the third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that the contents of a first hit type selection table 202b and a prize ball table 202e are different, and the other points are the same. Differences in the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 65A and 66, and differences in the contents of the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 65B. I do. Note that the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c have the same contents as those in the above-described second embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 selection table 202b2.

  The special figure 1 selection table 202b1 is a table used for selecting a big hit type when a big hit is made based on the ball entering the first left winning opening 64a, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is used. This is a table used to select a jackpot type when a jackpot has been won based on a ball entering the second winning port 640. The special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 are defined by different ratios of the jackpot type, and are provided to the player in the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The expected value of the number of payout balls to be paid out is set to be different.

  Specifically, the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and (b), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the big hit B and the big hit C can be selected, respectively. Are set to be different.

  Specifically, in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the value "0-29" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the jackpot B determination value, and "30-99" is set as the jackpot C determination value. (See FIG. 66A). In the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the value "0-69" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the jackpot B determination value, and "70-99" is set as the jackpot C determination value. (See FIG. 66 (b)).

  As described above, the "big hit B" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player because the "big hit B" is a big hit in which the lottery is performed to determine whether or not the probability is changed. Therefore, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is a more advantageous selection table for the player than the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, and is based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 rather than the left first winning port 64a. A jackpot that is advantageous to the player is likely to be selected. Further, similarly to the second embodiment, the number of payout balls based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is set to be larger than that of the left first winning opening 64a. As a result, adjustment can be made to be more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player as compared to the second embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the ball entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot is entered into the left first winning opening 64a. May be configured such that a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is more easily selected. Thereby, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a in terms of the number of payout balls, and to select the jackpot type, the first first winning left than the second winning opening 640. It is possible for the player to enter the mouth 64a to be advantageous. This makes it possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, the prize ball table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The number of payout balls to be paid out is defined in the prize ball table 202e according to the type of the winning port that has entered the ball. Specifically, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a is one, and the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 is three. The number of payout balls when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 640 is 10 balls, and the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the normal winning opening 63 is 5 balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 from the left first winning opening 64a is set to be large. As a result, when a large number of game balls passing through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous for the player, while otherwise, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with adjusting nails t1 and t2 capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball having passed through the passing port 645 to the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640, respectively. ing. Thereby, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game balls that have passed through the passage 645 win a large amount of money in the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to adjust whether or not it is advantageous for the player. In the third embodiment, when a big hit is made based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, a big hit that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than the big hit based on the first left winning opening 64a. As a result, the adjustment can be made to be more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player than in the second embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the number of payout balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 is larger than that of the left first winning opening 64a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of payout balls to be paid out when the ball enters the left first winning opening 64a may be configured to be larger than that. Thereby, in selecting the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a, but the number of payout balls is more leftward than the second winning opening 640. It is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the one winning opening 64a. This makes it possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the second embodiment in that a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a change execution flag 203w1, and a change order storage area 203w2. Are provided, and the other points are the same.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol) as in the first embodiment, and is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol) as in the first embodiment, and is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d described above. The only difference is that the left first winning opening 63a or the right first winning opening 63b (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The variation execution flag 203w1 is a flag for setting which one of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is to be used for performing the variation. The change execution flag 203w1 is set based on data of a change order storage area 203w2 described later in the change execution determination processing (see FIG. 70), and is referred to in the processing of S252 and S253 of the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 69). Is done. Note that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is interrupted, and is set to change based on the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in the initial state after the RAM is cleared.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is an area for storing a winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c. Eight storage areas are set in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. The storage area is also shifted based on the start of the change of the special symbol.

  Next, contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the second embodiment in that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the stop type change counter 223g, and the stop type changed counter 223h. And that a reserved symbol storage area 223i is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As in the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c outputs the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol from the main control device 110 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. The only difference is that the information is stored based on the number of reserved balls command, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The stop type change counter 223g displays the stop display displayed in the next variation when the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223f is greater than 4, as described above. This is a counter for determining whether or not to change to a continuation display (see FIG. 62 (b)) indicating a continuous change. The stop type change counter 223g is a continuation display that is executed when a pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 based on a ball entering the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640 is received. In the determination process (see FIG. 75), when the stop symbol of the variation currently being executed cannot be replaced, 1 is added. In the stop type reception process (see FIG. 74) executed when the stop type command is received, 1 is subtracted when the stop type is changed to the stop type of the continuous display (see S2252). Furthermore, when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display, it is necessary to change the display of the reserved symbol according to the change, and the stop type change counter 223g refers to the suspended symbol setting process (see FIG. 76). And a process corresponding to the value is executed.

  The stop type changed counter 223h is used by the above-described stop type counter 223g and the like to determine whether or not the stop symbol has been changed to a continuous display (see FIG. 62 (b)) indicating a pseudo continuous change. It is a counter. The stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 when the stop symbol is changed to the continuous display in the stop type receiving process (see S2053 in FIG. 74), and starts to change in the change display setting process (that is, the change). Is completed) is decremented by 1 (S2152 in FIG. 79). The stop type change counter 223g is referred to in the stop type change counter in the holding symbol setting process (see FIG. 76).

  The reserved symbol storage area 223j is an area for storing information on reserved symbols to be displayed on the display control device 114. In the reserved symbol storage area 223j, the number of reserved symbols (normal reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds1 area and the reserved symbols (special reserved symbols) displayed in the Ds4 area of the third symbol display device 81 described above. There is an area for storing the number of display items. The reserved symbol storage area 223j is updated by a reserved symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) when a retained ball count command is received from the main controller 110. The specific contents will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
In the control processing in the third embodiment, a part of the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the second embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  A control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a part of the special symbol change process, the big hit setting process, and the start winning process is changed. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol change process (SS104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change processing (S104). The same processes as those in the above-described second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, in the processing of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. (N2) is obtained (S203), and a fluctuation execution determination process is executed (S251).

  Here, the variation execution determination processing (S251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this variation execution determination processing (S251). The variation execution determination process (S251) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 69), and is an effect pattern of a variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. (Variable effect pattern) is a process for determining which area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203c is to be executed based on the values of the various counters stored therein. is there.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203w1 (S3001), and data of the variation order storage area 203w2 is acquired (S3002). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203w2 is shifted (S3003). In the process of S3003, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203w2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → suspended third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004).

  In the process of S3004, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is the special figure 1 (S3004: Yes), the variable execution flag 203w1 is set to the variable execution in the special figure 1 (S3005), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol change process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 1 (S3004: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006). In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is the special figure 2 (S3006: Yes), the variable execution flag 203w1 is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S3007), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol change process.

  In the process of S3006, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is not the special figure 2 (S3006: No), there is no pending ball to execute the variation, and thus the process is terminated while the variation execution flag 203w1 remains in the initial state. Then, the process returns to the special symbol change process.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When the process of S251 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variable execution is performed in the special figure 2 (S252). Specifically, with reference to the variation execution flag 203w1 set in the process of S251, if the variation execution flag 203w1 is the special figure 2, it is determined that the variable execution is performed in the special figure 2.

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that the variation is to be executed in the special figure 2 (S252: Yes), in order to start the variation of the second special symbol, the processes from S205 to S208 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Is performed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the special figure 2 that the execution is not to be changed (S252: No), the process proceeds to S253.

  In the process of S253, if it is determined in the special figure 1 that the variation is not to be executed (S253: No), there is no pending ball for which the variation is to be executed, and thus the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the special figure 1 that the variable execution is to be performed (S253: Yes), the processes from S210 to S213, which are the same processes as the above-described first embodiment, are executed, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the change in the special figure 2 is determined prior to the special figure 1. However, whether or not to execute the change in the special figure 1 is determined as compared with the special figure 2. The determination may be made first. Thus, it is possible to set which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is to be preferentially determined.

  In the special symbol 2 change start process (S213), the special symbol 1 change start process 2 (S208) is set so that the ratio of selecting the big hit B and the big hit C is different. As described above, the jackpot B is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot C, and the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 has a higher selection ratio of the jackpot B. Therefore, the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 It is more advantageous for the player to select the jackpot type based on. That is, the big hit based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 is more advantageous than the big hit based on the ball entering the first left winning port 64a.

  Thus, if the adjusting nails t1 and t2 are adjusted so that the game ball that has passed through the passing opening 645 can easily win the second winning opening 640, it can be adjusted so as to be advantageous to the player. If it is adjusted so that it is not, it can be adjusted so as to be disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 are set so that the selection ratios of the jackpot types are different from each other. Is selected, and in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, the type of the jackpot is made different so that the "16 round jackpot" is selected, thereby adjusting whether or not it is advantageous for the player. You may be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a jackpot setting process 3 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 3 (S254). The jackpot setting process 3 (S254) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 69), and is a process for setting to start a jackpot game. In the jackpot setting process 3 (S254) in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a jackpot (S2551), in contrast to the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the jackpot type is determined (S2552 or S2553) according to the result, and the other points are the same, so that the description is omitted.

  First, in the big hit setting process 3 (S233), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit (S2551). If it is determined by the processing of S2551 that it is the first special symbol big hit (S2551: Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, and the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not a big hit (the second special symbol is a big hit) in the process of S2551, the big hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, and the process proceeds to S2502. Transition. By the processing of S2551 to S2553, the jackpot type corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be determined, and a jackpot game can be executed based on the jackpot type.

  When the process proceeds to S2502, the processes of S2502 to S2504 are executed and the process ends, as in the second embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the left first winning opening 64a. This is a process for judging the presence or absence of a prize (starting prize) in the second prize port 640 and, when there is a starting prize, holding processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the left first winning port 64a (S501). Here, the ball that has entered the left first winning port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  Then, there is no winning in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the left first winning opening 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S503: No), the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the left first winning opening 64a (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process 2 (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are special symbols. One special ball 1 is stored in the one reserved ball storage area 203a (S506), the special figure 1 is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S551), and the process proceeds to S507. In the process of S551, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203w is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, when the value is 2, the second area is set, when the value is 3, the third area is set, and when the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the change order storage area 203k in the change execution determination processing (S251) described above, the start opening changes the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, Even when there are two kinds of fluctuations, that is, a fluctuation of the symbol, the fluctuation can be started in the order in which the winning opening is won.

  In the processing of S507, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (start winning) (S507). When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S507: Yes), the same processing as that in the case of winning in the left first winning opening 64a is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S508), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S509: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S510), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S511). Then, the respective values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (S512), and are stored in the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. The special map 2 is set (S552), and this processing ends. The determination of the first area in S552 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S551.

  If there is no winning in the first winning opening 640 (S507: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4. (S509: No), the process proceeds to the prefetching process (S513), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, a part of the command determination processing 2 (S1611), the stop type reception processing (S1705), and the variable display setting processing (S1612) are changed from the first control example. In this respect, the configuration is different, and the other configuration is the same.

  First, the command determination process 3 (S1611) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a view showing a flowchart of the command determination process 3 (S1611). The third embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that a stop type receiving process (S1751) is executed instead of the processes in S1705 and S1706, and a continuous display determination process (S1751) is executed instead of the process in S1708. (S1751), and is changed to execute the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 3 (S1611), first, the processes of S1701 to S1704 are executed as in the second embodiment. If it is determined in step S1704 that a stop type command has been received, stop type reception processing is executed (S1705), and this process ends.

  Here, the stop type receiving process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a view showing a flowchart of the stop type receiving process (S1705).

  In the stop type reception process (S1705), first, the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3101), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3102), and the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the processing of S3103, it is determined whether or not the stop type counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3103). In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is 0 (S3103: No), there is no need to change the stop type, and thus the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the stop type counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3103: Yes), the stop type needs to be changed, and thus the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the continuous display. It is changed (S3104). Thereafter, the stop type change counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S2053), the stop type change counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3105), and the process ends.

  Here, the stop type change counter 223i indicates that the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more due to the game ball entering the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640 during the changeable period of the variable effect. In this case, 1 is added. By adding 1 to the stop type change counter 223i, the received stop type can be changed to the stop type of the continuous display in the process of S3104. Thereby, even if a game ball enters during the period in which the fluctuation effect cannot be replaced and the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more, the stop type of the next fluctuation effect can be changed to the stop type of the continuous display. . This allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuously executed and the next variable effect is started without digesting the reserved ball. Therefore, in the case where the number of reserved balls recognized by the player is four, but the actual number of reserved balls is five, the actual reserved balls are not disturbed by the player. The number of balls can be reduced from five to four, and a floating effect can be started.

  In addition, by adding 1 to the stop type changed counter 223h, in the holding symbol setting process (see FIG. 76) to be described later, the increasing symbol holding process is executed (see FIG. 77) or the decreasing holding symbol is set. It can be determined whether to execute the setting process (see FIG. 78).

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1704 that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is then determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received (S1706). In the processing of S1706, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has been received (S1706: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the reserved number-of-ball counter of the corresponding special symbol (S1707). The continuation display determination processing is executed (S1751), the reserved symbol setting processing is executed (S1752), and this processing ends.

  Here, the continuation determination processing (S1751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the continuation determination processing (S1751). In this continuation determination processing (S1751), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 receives a pending ball number command transmitted based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first left winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640. This is the process that is executed in the case. In the continuation determination process (S1751), the stop type is changed to the stop type of the continuous display based on the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. This is a process of determining whether or not to change.

  In the continuous display determination processing (S1751), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are acquired (S3201), and the total value is obtained. It is determined whether (N1 + N2) is greater than 4 (S3202). In the process of S3202, when it is determined that the total value (N1 + N2) is not larger than 4 (that is, 4 or less) (S3202: No), there is no need to change the stop type, and thus the process is directly performed. finish.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the total value (N1 + N2) is larger than 4 (that is, 5 or more) (S3202: Yes), then, is the stop type changed counter 223h equal to 0? It is determined whether or not it is (S3203). In the process of S3203, if it is determined that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3203: No), the stop type change counter being executed is already changed to the continuous display, so the stop type change counter is changed to the stop type change counter. One is added (S3207), and this processing ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the stop symbols from being changed to the continuous display repeatedly.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the stop type changed counter 223h is 0 (S3203: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a stop symbol replacement period is available (S3204). In the process of S3204, if it is determined that the period is not the replacement period of the stop symbol, the stop type change counter is incremented by 1 to change the stop symbol of the next fluctuation effect as described above (S3207), This processing ends.

  Here, in the process of S3204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol can be replaced during the fluctuating period. The period in which the stop symbol can be changed during the fluctuating period (replaceable period) is determined in advance. It is determined for each variation pattern, and whether or not the period has elapsed is determined by a timer (not shown).

  If it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop symbol replacement period is available, a stop type command for display (continuous display) is set (S3205), and the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S3206). Then, the present process ends. The display stop type command (continuous display) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 52) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. In S1802), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives this display stop type command (continuous display) so that when the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol, the stop symbol is displayed continuously. The information of the set stop type is overwritten.

  In addition, since the stop type changed counter 223h is incremented by 1 in the process of S3206, it is possible to suppress the execution of the overlapping change of the stop type in the process of S3203 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of a reserved symbol setting process (S1752) executed after the continuous display determination process (S1751). FIG. 76 is a view showing a flowchart of the reserved symbol setting process (S1752). This reserved symbol setting process (S1752) is a process executed when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, and based on a change in whether the reserved ball number increases or decreases, the reserved ball number is determined. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to a change in the number.

  In the reserved symbol setting process, first, the data of the reserved symbol storage area 223i is obtained (S3301), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is acquired (S3302). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has increased based on the values acquired by the processing of S3301 and S3302 (S3303).

  Specifically, the total value of the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is the display of the normal reserved symbol in the reserved symbol storage area 223i. If the number is larger than the sum of the number of special reserved symbols and the number of displayed special reserved symbols, it is determined that the number is increased, and if it is smaller, it is determined that the number is reduced.

  Here, when the number of reserved balls changes due to the winning of the game balls or the start of the change of the special symbol, the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is transmitted. When this reserved ball number command is received, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (step S1707 of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 73)) N2) is updated. After that, since the reserved symbol setting process (S1752) is executed, the total value of the reserved symbol number counters (223b, 223f) of the special symbol is compared with the total value of the display numbers of the reserved symbol storage area 223i. It can be determined whether the number of reserved balls has increased or decreased.

  In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: Yes), a reserve symbol setting process at the time of increase is executed (S3304), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the number of reserved balls has increased (S3303: No), a reduced-time reserved symbol setting process is executed (S3305), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the increase-time holding symbol setting process (S3304) will be described. FIG. 77 is a view showing a flowchart of the increase-time holding symbol setting process (S3304). This increase-time reserved symbol setting processing (S3304) is based on a ball entering the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640, and the reserved ball transmitted from the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls increases. This is a process when a number command is received. The data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is updated based on the increase in the number of reserved balls, and a display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbols on the display control device 114 is set. This is the process to perform.

  In the increase-time reserved symbol setting process, first, data of the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of displayed normal reserved symbols stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is 4 (S3402). In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of the normal reserved symbols is four (S3402: Yes), the normal reserved symbols (the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1) have reached the upper limit value (4). Then, the display number of the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds4) is incremented by 1 (S3403), and the flow shifts to the process of S3405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of displayed normal reserved symbols is not 4 (S3402: No), the normal reserved symbols (the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1) reach the upper limit value (4). Since it is not, the display number of the normal reserved symbol is incremented by 1 (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405.

  When the processing of S3402 or S3403 is completed, a display reserved ball count command is set based on the reserved symbol storage area 223i updated by the processing of S3402 or S3403 (S3405), and this processing ends. The display pending ball count command set in the process of S3405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 (S1802). Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display reserved ball count command, the display control device 114 executes a process of updating the display of the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds4 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display of the reserved symbols on the third symbol display device 81 can be updated based on the main controller 110 detecting the winning of the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the reduced hold symbol setting process (S3305). FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reduced-time holding symbol setting process (S3305). This decrease-time reserved symbol setting process (S3305) is a process in the case where a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the number of reserved balls is reduced based on the start of the change of the special symbol, This is a process for updating the data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i based on the decrease in the number of reserved balls, and setting a display reserved ball number command for displaying the reserved symbols on the display control device 114.

  In the reduced-time reserved symbol setting process (S3305), first, data in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is acquired (S3501). Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502). In the process of S3502, when it is determined that the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (S3502: Yes), the display number of the special reserved symbol in the reserved symbol storage area 223i is decremented by 1 (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3505. Transition. In the process of S3502, when the stop type completed change counter 223h is larger than 0, the stop type has been changed to the continuous display in the last change of the special symbol, and the stop display before the start of the current change becomes the continuous display. Is the case.

  Thereby, when the stop display of the change of the special symbol started last time is a continuous display (see FIG. 62 (b)), the display number of the special reserved symbol is decremented by one. Based on this, the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4 in the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by one. Since the stop symbol of the previous change display is a continuous display indicating continuous change, the player does not reduce the change of the special symbol without reducing the reserved symbol of the small area Ds1, which is an easy-to-recognize mode. Even if you start it, you will not feel strange. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved symbols in the small area Ds4, which is a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, by one, and start the change of the special symbol without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Here, the stop type change counter 223h is added by the stop type reception processing when the stop type change counter 223g is larger than 0 (that is, when the number of reserved balls becomes 5 or more and a special reserved symbol is set). . Therefore, when the stop type changed counter 223h is larger than 0, it means that there is a special hold symbol. As a result, in the process of S3503, there is no problem that the number of special reserved symbols is not displayed and cannot be subtracted. In the process of S3503, if the number of special reserved symbols to be displayed is 0 and cannot be subtracted, error processing may be performed. Specifically, a process of setting a display error command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 to display a message indicating an error is exemplified. This makes it possible to detect a problem that the stop type changed counter is added due to the influence of noise or the like, even though the number of special reserved symbols to be displayed is zero.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3502 that the stop type changed counter 223h is not 0 (S3502: No), it means that the stop type has been changed to the continuous display in the previous special symbol change. Therefore, irrespective of the presence or absence of the special reserved symbol, the display number of the normal reserved symbol is decremented by 1 (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507.

  As a result, when there is no special reserved symbol, the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be reduced by one. In addition, when there is a special hold symbol, the stop type changed completed counter 223h is 0, that is, since the stop symbol of the change of the special symbol started last time is not changed to the continuous display, the special hold symbol is changed. As in the case where there is no symbol, the normal reserved symbol (the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1) can be reduced by one.

  As described above, when the variable effect is stopped in the continuous display (see FIG. 62 (b)), the special reserved symbol can be reduced by one and displayed at the start of the next variable effect by the process of S3503. (See FIG. 62 (c)). On the other hand, if the variable effect is not stopped in the continuous display, the normal reserved symbols can be reduced by one and displayed by the process of S3504 at the start of the next variable effect (see FIG. 64A).

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the stop type has been changed can be determined by adding and subtracting the stop type changed counter 223h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be stored in a ring buffer or the like, and the determination may be made by referring to the stop type displayed last time.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a view showing a flowchart of the variable display setting processing 3 (S1612). The variable display setting process 3 (S1612) in the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that a determination process of the stop type changed counter 223h and a subtraction process are added, and other processes are performed. Are the same, and a detailed description of the same portions will be omitted.

  After finishing the process in S2104, it is determined whether or not the stop type changed counter 223h is larger than 0 (S2151). In the processing of S2151, the stop type changed counter is determined to be larger than 0 when the stop type is changed in the change of the special symbol started before the change of the special symbol to start the change this time. Therefore, the stop type changed counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S2152), and the process proceeds to S2105.

  With this, the stop type changed counter 223h can be decremented after the change display of the special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display, so that the change of the next special symbol whose stop type has been changed to the continuous display can be performed. Only at the start of the display change, the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4) can be reduced by the processing of S3503 of the above-mentioned reduced reserved symbol setting processing (S3303). Therefore, when the stop symbol of the continuation display is not displayed, the special reserved symbol (the reserved symbol of the small area Ds4), which is a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, is reduced and the change of the special symbol is not started. When the stop symbol of the continuation display is not displayed, the normal symbol (the symbol in the small area Ds1), which is a mode that is easy for the player to see, is reduced and the special symbol starts to change. Can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passing port 645 enters the left first winning port 64a or the second winning port 640, A jackpot lottery is held. The left first prize port 64a and the second prize port 640 are set with a prize ball table 202e (see FIG. 65 (d)) so that the number of payout balls to be paid out when a game ball enters is different. I have. Specifically, while the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the left first winning port 64a is one, the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 is: It has three balls. Therefore, if a large number of game balls passing through the passage opening 645 win the second winning opening 640, it is advantageous for the player, while if not, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, in the jackpot based on the left first winning port 64a and the jackpot based on the second winning port 640, the jackpot based on the second winning port 640 is more easily selected as a jackpot type advantageous to the player. A first hit type selection table 202b is set. Specifically, in the jackpot based on the left first winning opening 64a, the "big hit C" is more likely to be selected than in the "big hit B" (see FIG. 66 (a)). “Big hit B” is easier to select than “C” (FIG. 66 (b)).

  Here, as described above, the “big hit B” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit C” because it is a big hit in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the hit is changed. Therefore, as for the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning port 640, the "big jackpot B" which is an advantageous jackpot for the player is more easily selected than the jackpot based on the ball entering the first left winning port 64a.

  Thus, the number of balls to be paid out to the second winning port 640 is larger than that to the left first winning port 64a, and a big hit that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected. In comparison, the ball is more advantageous for the player to enter. As a result, by adjusting the ratio of game balls passing through the passage 645 to the left first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 640, respectively, by adjusting the adjustment nails t1 and t2, a comparison with the second embodiment is achieved. In addition, the adjustment of whether or not it is advantageous for the player can be adjusted with more strength.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the ball entry into the second winning opening 640 is configured so that a jackpot advantageous to the player is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot is entered into the left first winning opening 64a. May be configured such that a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is more easily selected. Thereby, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the second winning opening 640 than to the left first winning opening 64a in terms of the number of payout balls, and to select the jackpot type, the first first winning left than the second winning opening 640. It is possible for the player to enter the mouth 64a to be advantageous. This makes it possible to make adjustments so as not to be too advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  In the third embodiment, the reserved symbol indicating that the number of reserved balls is larger than a predetermined value (four in the present embodiment) is a special reserved symbol (the third symbol device 81 of the third symbol device 81) which is difficult for the player to recognize. This is displayed as a reserved symbol in the small area Ds4 (see FIG. 60B). Thereby, for example, in the case of adjusting so as not to enter one of the left first winning opening 64a and the second winning opening 640, the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. And the player is dissatisfied because the number of reserved balls does not increase more than 4 balls, but if the player recognizes that the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 balls, the number of reserved balls is more than 4 balls Even if it does not increase, you can avoid such dissatisfaction.

  In addition, the motor-operated objects 645a and 645b are arranged so that game balls can easily enter the passage 645. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Game balls are provided only in the first left winning opening 64a and only in the first right winning opening 64b. You may comprise so that guidance may be made easy. In this case, the side wall forming the left first ball entry port 64a or the right first winning port 64b of the base body 64c is constituted by rotating vanes (electrically-operated objects), and the game ball is rotated by rotating. May be configured to easily enter the left first ball entry port 64a or the right first ball entry port 64b. By adopting such a configuration, for example, by attaching an electric accessory to the right first winning opening 64b, it is possible to pay out a large number of game balls during working hours or during probable changes, thereby reducing the number of balls held by the player. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for shifting to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In the present embodiment, when the player wins the left first winning opening 64a, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed, and when the player wins the right first winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed. Here, when the special symbol 2 becomes a big hit in the lottery, the big hit game in which the probability change game is easily given is more easily executed than in the case where the special symbol 1 becomes the big hit. Therefore, by arranging the electric accessory in place of the side wall of the right first winning opening 64b, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed during the probable change or during the working hours, so that in the probable changing state or the working hours state, In addition, it is possible to easily provide a certainty-variable game (the probability of providing a certainty-variable game can be increased).

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of probable states having different degrees of advantage for the player and a plurality of time reduction states having different degrees of advantage are provided. More specifically, in the present embodiment, as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, the player who wins the lottery by the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to easily obtain more benefits for the player. That is, when the second special symbol lottery wins, a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than when the first special symbol lottery wins, and a special symbol is obtained. (The jackpot type that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is easily selected). Then, as the special symbol change state, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the random change state 1. Probabilistic state 2 (ie, relatively advantageous) is provided. In addition, as the normal symbol time reduction state, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the second special symbol lottery is executed compared to the time reduction state 1. An easy (ie, relatively advantageous) time-saving state 2 is provided. By varying the amount of prize balls that can be obtained according to the state and the rate of transition to the probable change state, a game can be played aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probable change state 1 is a state where the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined, and the probable change state 2 is a state where the probable change state of the special symbol and the time reduction state 2 are combined.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the main control device 110. In the first embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are the first embodiment. The point is that the pachinko machine 10 has been changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three entrances are provided in which a lottery of a special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Specifically, a first entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, and a right second entrance provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view. 64b, and a right first ball entrance 64a2 provided on the right side in front view of the right second ball entrance 64b.

  In each of the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2, a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-described two types of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. It is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a first operating accessory 645a is attached to the right first ball entrance 64a2. The first actor 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the right first entrance 64a2, and cannot enter the right first entrance 64a2 ( Difficult). The first operating character 645a switches to an open state when a ball enters a first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting prize winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first actor 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  Similarly, a second actuation accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. The second actor 645b also has an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) the right second ball entry port 64b, and a ball cannot enter the right second ball entry port 64b ( Difficult). The second actor 645b attached to the second actor 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second actuation port 707 provided inside the sorting prize device 700. On the other hand, the second actor 645b switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters.

  A sorting prize device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. The sorting winning device 700 is a device for sorting (entering) a ball that has entered the interior to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (enters the ball), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first input port 64a2 switches to the open state, and the right first input ball The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (enters the ball), the second operating role 645b attached to the right second input port is switched to the open state, and the ball is moved to the right second input port 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

  Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the distribution winning device 700. The upper side of the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured so that a ball can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, since the upper surface side of the sorting prize winning device 700 is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the sphere reaching the upper surface of the sorting prize winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction. I do. An electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the sorting prize device 700. The electric accessory 701 has an open state (immersive state) in which a ball can enter (easily) the ball into the sorting prize device 700 and a closed state (projected state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And are switchable. The electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when a win is made by a normal symbol lottery.

  The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. Since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707. At a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the inside of the sorting prize device 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is set to a switching valve ( A variable flow path 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706 (sliding displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. Proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, the second switching state is a state in which the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right in front view to close the upstream side of the first flow path and open only the first flow path. , The sphere proceeds to the second flow path.

  The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is set for a predetermined period (eg, 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hit state) after the normal symbol hit. ) Is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state based on the lapse of ()). When a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the switching to the second switching state, the switching to the first switching state is performed again.

  If the ball can enter the sorting prize device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down to the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second entrance port 64b. That is, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of giving the special symbol probable change state in the case of the big hit, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the flowing direction (whether flowing down the first flow path 703 or flowing down the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 81, a first operation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operation port 704. The first operating port 704 is formed of a known non-motorized accessory, that is, switches the first operating accessory 645a to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first operating port 704. Can be. In addition, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entrance opening 64a2.

  On the other hand, a second operation mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operation port 707. The second operation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operation mechanism 705. In other words, the second actor 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second actuation port 707. When the second actor 645b is in the open state, the second actor 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entrance 64b.

  As described above, by causing the ball to enter the sorting prize winning device 700, the ball is allowed to enter the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating agent 645a or the The second actor 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special symbol 2 lottery wins, it becomes more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. Can be noticed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, two types (open pattern A and open pattern B) are provided for the operation of the electric accessory 701 (open pattern). When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the start of the normal symbol hit, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Is done. Then, after the open state for 0.1 second is set, the hit state ends. In the one second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. . On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state. It is distributed to. However, since it is difficult to make the ball enter during the opening period of 0.1 second, in many cases, the ball entering the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is The ball is distributed to the first operation port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when the open pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (ie, 0.1 second) immediately after the start of the normal symbol hit, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, the hit state ends after the open state for a relatively long time (that is, one second) is set. During the opening period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting win device 700 during this time passes to the first operating port 704. Will be sorted out. However, as described above, it is difficult to make a ball enter during an extremely short open period of 0.1 second. On the other hand, in the opening period of one second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 during this time passes to the second operating port 707. Will be sorted out. Therefore, in many cases, a ball that has entered the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is sorted to the second operating port 707, and the right second ball entry port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the degree of advantage for the player can be made different depending on the set opening pattern, so that the player can be interested in the opening pattern each time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the set opening pattern is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time saving state), the time saving state 1, and the probable variable state 1, when the player hits the symbol, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time-saving state 2 and the probable change state 2, an open pattern B is set when a normal drawing is hit. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probable change state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probable change state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. As described above, the type of the special symbol that is easily executed according to the game state can be made different, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. At the lower left of the game board 13, a variable winning device 65 is provided, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery performed due to a ball entry (winning) into the first entry port 64a1, the right first entry port 64a2, or the right second entry port 64b, After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to show the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). Note that the structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 42 to 44) in the second embodiment. Although the details are omitted because it is as described above in the second embodiment, the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering device 65 during the jackpot passes through the internal variable switch 65e3 inside the jackpot, resulting in a jackpot. After completion, a probable change state is given.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90A shows the selection for the special figure 1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202b1, and FIG. 90B is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is selected for the second special symbol lottery. Is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit.

  First, the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the selected big hit type is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 9”. The big hit A is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the positive variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the positive variable switch 65e during the big hit, and the time saving state 1 is given after the big hit. . The pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the provision of the probability change switch 65e in the variable winning device 65). (Opened channel is opened). Since the player hits the ball continuously toward the variable winning device 65 at the jackpot, one or more balls can be caused to flow down to the variable switch 65e in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability change switch 65e at the jackpot, a special symbol change state is given after the jackpot. In other words, after the big hit, the probability change state 1 in which the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state 1 are combined is given. On the other hand, when the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e during the jackpot because the player did not hit the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot has ended. Although the jackpot A is likely to be in the probability change state, the probability change state to be given is the probability change state 1 and the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability change state, so the jackpot type to which the probability change state 2 is likely to be given ( It is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

  The big hit B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 49”. The big hit B is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the positive change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the positive change switch 65e during the big hit, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the big hit. . When the ball passes the probability change switch 65e at the jackpot, a special symbol change state is given after the jackpot. That is, after the big hit, the probability change state 2 in which the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e during the jackpot because the player did not hit the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot B ends. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot B easily transitions to the probable change state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, on the surface of the prize sphere, it is disadvantageous in the case of the prize sphere because it is less than the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The big hit C is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 94”. The jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability change switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. Note that the pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability change switch in the variable winning device 65). 65e is opened). Even if four rounds are started and the ball enters at the same time that the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the positive variable solenoid 65k for 0.5 seconds, The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the probable solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the big hit C, the special symbol probable change state is not given after the big hit. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the special symbol change state is not given, and the time-saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since the number of hits is smaller than in the case of a jackpot in a lottery, the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous for the player.

  The big hit D is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 94”. The jackpot D is a round type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variable switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability change state is not given, and the prize ball is also smaller than in the case of the big win in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, since the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, the big hit D Is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

  Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 90B, similarly to the selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1, the selected big hit type is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2 in the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 as well. ing. Specifically, the big hit E is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 19”. The big hit E is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the positive variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the positive variable switch 65e during the big hit, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the big hit. . Although the jackpot E is likely to be in the probability change state, the probability change state to be given is the probability change state 1 and the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be performed during the probability change state, so the jackpot type to which the probability change state 2 is likely to be given ( The state after the end of the jackpot is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

  The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is fifteen rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. . The jackpot F is easy to shift to the probable change state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player, and is therefore one of the most advantageous jackpot types in the game state after the jackpot. Also, on the prize ball side, it is possible to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the case of a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the jackpot that is most advantageous for the player.

  The big hit G is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 84”. This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is fifteen rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the special symbol change state is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute is given, so that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the case of the prize ball, it is more advantageous than a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The jackpot H is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 94”. This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is fifteen rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variable switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. Although the probability change state is not given, the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, so that the big hit H is more advantageous than the big hit C or the big hit G. In addition, the prize sphere is more advantageous than a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Each jackpot type differs in the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, so that when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, the player can pay attention to which jackpot type it is. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is a big hit or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of award balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the big hit type that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e are determined. Is different. In other words, a player who wins the lottery in the second special symbol lottery can obtain more prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. In the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot types (jackpots E and F), which are the operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e, is 80%, whereas In the special symbol lottery, the percentage of the jackpot types (jackpots A and B) that are operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e is 50%. Therefore, it is easy to be in a certainty change state if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the lottery executed is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Pay attention to the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83, a method of shifting the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big hit occurs, a new game state is set after the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 83, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probable non-time saving state), basically (unless the launch of the ball is stopped during the jackpot), the state shifts to the probable state 1 and the jackpot B is reached. Then, the state shifts to the probable change state 2. When the jackpot C is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 1, and when the jackpot D is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the time reduction state 1 (the time reduction state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed) and the probable change state 1 (the probability change state in which the second special symbol lottery is hard to be executed). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probable variable non-time saving state). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probable change state 1, if a lottery of a special symbol for the number of time savings is executed without a jackpot, the state shifts to a normal state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 83, when the gaming state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the jackpot E is reached, the state shifts to the positive change state 1 and the jackpot F is reached. Then, the state shifts to the most advantageous probabilistic change state 2. When the jackpot G is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 1, and when the jackpot H is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 2 (loops the time reduction state 2). Also, as shown in FIG. 83, the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed in the probability change state 2 (the probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probable change state 2, if a lottery of a special symbol for the number of time savings is executed without a jackpot, the state shifts to a normal state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203s, probability variation passing counter 203t1, winning number counter 203t2, operation counter 203t3, counter buffer 203h, remaining ball timer flag 203t4, remaining ball timer 203t5. , A variable probability validity flag 203t6, a variable probability validity timer 203t7, a discharge number counter 203t8, a time reduction counter 203u, a time reduction identification flag 203x, a big hit flag 203i, and at least a memory area 203z.

  Among these, special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol Regarding the reserved ball number counter 203f, the probability change counter 203g, the counter buffer 203h, the jackpot flag 203i, and the other memory area 203z, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Reserved ball storage area 203b, ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, positive variable counter 203g, counter buffer 203h, jackpot flag 03i, and is identical with other memory areas 203Z, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, each of the probability change passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probability variation enable flag 203t6, the probability variation enable timer 203t7, and the discharge number counter 203t8 are each the second embodiment. Are the same as the probable variable passage counter 203t1, the winning number counter 203t2, the operation counter 203t3, the remaining ball timer flag 203t4, the remaining ball timer 203t5, the probable variable valid flag 203t6, the probable variable valid timer 203t7, and the number of discharged counter 203t8 provided in the RAM 203. . Since these details have been described in the description of the second embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  The time saving identification flag 203x is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0, it means that the time saving state is 1 (probable change state 1). Note that, similarly to the time saving state 1, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 even in the normal state where the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. On the other hand, when 1 is set in the time-saving identification flag 203x, it means that it is in the time-saving state 2 (probable change state 2). When a normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203x. Specifically, when the time-saving identification flag 203x is 0 and a normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball enters the distribution winning prize device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operation port 704, and the ball enters the left first entry port 64a2. On the other hand, when the time-saving identification flag 203x is 1 and a normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is put into the sorting and winning prize device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operation port 707, and the ball enters the left second entry port 64b. In the time saving identification flag 203x, a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot is set. In addition, 0 is set when the time reduction period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the counter 203u during the time reduction becomes 0).

  It should be noted that the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 in the normal state (non-probable variable non-working time state) because an irregular game in which the ball is hit rightward of the game board 13 in the non-working time state (so-called right-handed). This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player always makes a right-handed attempt to execute an advantageous second special symbol lottery. In the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to make the ball enter the right second entrance 64b. Since it is in a probable change state, the merit in the case of a jackpot is increased. Therefore, there is a possibility that an irregular game method is induced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving identification flag 203x is set to 0 in the normal state, so that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low and the open pattern A is set even if the hit occurs, Can be in a state where there is no merit of performing right-handed by the player. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be caused to perform a left-hand hit, so that an irregular playing method can be prevented (suppressed).

  The big hit flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit game is being executed. The big hit flag 203i is set to ON when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91), and is set to OFF in the ending process executed at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 91, a special symbol variation process 4 (S164) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol variation process 4 (S164).

  Of the special symbol change processing 4 (FIG. 91, S164), S201 to S218, S220. In each of the processes of S222 to S224, first of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49), S201 to S218, S220. And the same processing as the respective processing of S222 to S224 is executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 91) in the fourth embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S218 (S280). In the embodiment, it is reset to 0) (S271), and the process proceeds to S222.

  Also, in the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203u is greater than 0 (S272). When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203u is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the middle time counter 203u is decremented by 1 (S273), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203u is 0 (S272: No), the process of S273 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S223.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93, the prefetch processing 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process 4 (S513). This prefetching process 4 (S513) is a process executed in place of the prefetching process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment.

  In the prefetching process 4 (S513) of the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S601 and S603, the same processes as the processes of S601 and S603 of the prefetching process (see FIG. 17) of the first embodiment are respectively performed. Be executed.

  In the pre-reading process 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S601 that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64a1, the right first entrance 64a2, or the right second entrance 64b. (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of the change is the special symbol probable state (S671). The lottery result is obtained based on the random number table per one (S672), and the process proceeds to S674.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S671 that the gaming state is a certain state of the special symbol (S671: Yes), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (S673), The process shifts to S674. In the processing of S674, based on the lottery result, a winning information command including the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, is set (S674).

  After the winning information command is set in the processing of S674, it is determined whether the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is a special symbol large hit (S675). If the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is a special symbol large hit (S675: Yes), a prefetching certainty variable flag (not shown) is set to ON (S676), and this processing is performed. finish. The look-ahead probable changing flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of execution is the probable changing state. If on, it means that the lottery time is in the probable changing state. Means a low probability state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the process of S675 is not the special symbol jackpot (S675: No), the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the process of S672 or S673 is the normal bonus of the special symbol. Is determined (S677). If it is determined that the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is a normal jackpot of a special symbol (S677: Yes), the prefetching certainty changing flag (not shown) is set to OFF (S678), This processing ends. On the other hand, when the success or failure of the lottery predicted in the processing of S672 or S673 is out of the normal state of the special symbol (S677: No), the processing of S678 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process 4. The ordinary symbol variation process 4 is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment.

  In the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88), in each process of S701 to S714 and S718 to S725, S701 to S714 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S725 to S725 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is in the time saving state in the process of S714 (S714: Yes), the time saving identification flag is set. It is determined whether 203x is 0, that is, it is the time saving state 1 (S771). When it is determined that the flag is the identification flag 1 (time saving state 2) (S771: No), the electric accessory opening pattern B is set (S772). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S714 that the current time is not in the time reduction state (S714: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S771 that the identification flag is 0 (time reduction state 1) (S771: Yes), the electric accessory opening pattern A is set (S773).

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700, the motorized accessory release pattern A is set at the timing when the game ball is guided to the first operating port 704. Is an open pattern that protrudes (opens). Therefore, when the game ball enters the first operation port 704, the first operation accessory 645a is opened, so that the game ball can easily enter the right first entrance port 64a2, and the game ball can enter. By doing so, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Note that the setting of the time saving identification flag 203x is performed in the processing of S4106 and S4107 of the ending process 4 (FIG. 93, S1379) described later at the time of ending the big hit game, and the value is set to 0 or 0 based on the executed big hit type. 1 is set. Thus, when a big hit occurs, the time saving identification flag 203x is set according to the type of the big hit, so that a game ball is placed in the right first entrance 64a2 in the probable change game (the time saving game) to be subsequently executed according to the big hit type. It can be set by switching between setting to enter a ball or setting to allow a game ball to enter the right second entry opening 64b2. Therefore, since the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set to be larger in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, even in the same probable game state or the time saving game state, the probable change that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set a gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state and the gaming state, and to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S725 ends, the operation control of the variable flow path 702 is set (S774), and the process ends. Note that the operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is constant for all hits of the normal symbol, and is switched so as to guide the game ball to the first flow path for 1.5 seconds from the hit of the normal symbol. The valve 702 moves to the left to close the second flow path 706 and is controlled, and then moves to the right to close the first flow path 703 and guide game balls to the second flow path. After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, a description will be given of a startup process 4 executed in place of the startup process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 4. In the start-up process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S1001 to S1014 are the same as the respective processes in S1001 to S1014 in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the start-up process 4 (see FIG. 89) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S1010 is completed, the variable flow path 702 is initialized, and the process proceeds to S1011.

  Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1105). This jackpot control process 4 (S1105) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, executes various effects according to the jackpot, and opens the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Or, a process for closing.

  In the big hit control process 4, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301). In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), the big hit control does not need to be performed, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the big hit flag 203i is ON (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a big hit start timing (S1371). If it is determined in the processing of S1371 that it is the start timing of a jackpot (S1371: Yes), an opening command is set (S1372), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1371 that the timing is not the jackpot start timing (S1371: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1374). If it is determined in the processing of S1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1374: Yes), the setting of the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the setting of the switching operation of the positive change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k. Is performed (S1375), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the switching operation of the probable variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376). ).

  In the process of S1376, when it is determined that it is the timing of the switching operation of the probable variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: Yes), the state of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (S1377), and The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1376 that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probable variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (S1376: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1378). ).

  In the process of S1378, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1378: Yes), the ending process 4 is executed (S1379), and the process ends. The ending process 4 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1378, when it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1378: No), the winning process 4 is executed (S1380), the abnormal process 4 is executed (S1381), and the process ends. In the winning process 4 and the abnormal process 4, the same processes as the winning process (see FIG. 56) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment are respectively executed. The contents are as described above in the description of the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1375), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S4001). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S4001 (S4002). Then, an opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S4001 (S4003). After that, this processing ends.

  In this manner, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1379 in FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 4 (S1379). In the ending process 4 (S1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to off (S4102), and it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203s is on (S4103). If it is determined in the processing of S4103 that the probability change setting flag 203s is ON (S4103: Yes), the probability change counter 203g is set to 100 (S4104). Although not shown, the probability change setting flag 203s is configured to be turned off based on the probability change counter 203g being set to 100. After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S4105.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203s is not on (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

  In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105). If it is determined in the process of S4105 that the hit is one of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105: Yes), 0 is set to the time saving identification flag 203x (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4108.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4105, when it is determined that none of the jackpots A, C, E, and G is found (S4105: No), 1 is set to the time saving identification flag 203x (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4108. I do.

  By setting the time saving identification flag 203x to 0 or 1 by the processing in S4106 or S4107, the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 88) is switched.

  When the processing of S4106 or S4107 is completed, 100 is set to the value of the during-hours counter 203u (S4108), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time-saving state (probably variable game state or the time-saving game state) is given, the type of the time-saving state set by the jackpot type is set to be different. Thus, in the time-saving state executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the distribution prize device 700, the player enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. It is possible to switch between setting the game ball into the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the game ball into the right second ball entry port 64b, depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch between whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol, and the player is selected by the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is set differently, it is possible to change the size of the privilege given to the player according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the probability of change, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of working hours, the variation time, and the like are set as the first special symbol. The privilege may be set differently by setting differently from the second special symbol. In addition, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, even in the probability-change game state having the same jackpot probability, the type of the special symbol that fluctuates during the time-saving period (during the probability change) is switched according to the type of the time-saving state provided. And the benefits that the player in the probable play state can receive can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to set a probable change game state in which a plurality of benefits are different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot types guided to the probability change switch 65e3 is set to be greater in the hit type of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, so that a plurality of probability change ratios can be set. Therefore, the probability of change can be changed depending on the time saving state, and a game with freshness can be provided to the player.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows a command determination process 4 (S1671) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart. The command determination process 4 (S1671) is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110.

  The command determination process 4 (see FIG. 93) of the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment only in that the processes of S1713 to S1718 are deleted. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed, so that the details are omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage is different between a case where a jackpot is won by a lottery of a first special symbol and a case where a jackpot is won by a lottery of a second special symbol. 2 It is configured such that a player who wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. The time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance opening 64a2), and the time-saving state 2 is a lottery of the second special symbol. (The ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b). More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit occurs, the electric motor is driven at a timing at which the ball easily enters the first operating port 704 in the sorting winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is opened. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 1, the ball easily enters the right first entrance opening 64a1, and the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when a hit occurs, the electric accessory 701 is likely to enter the second operating port 707 inside the sorting prize winning device 700 (the second operating accessory 645 b is easily opened). Is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 2, the ball easily enters the second right entry opening 64b, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a probable change switch 65e3 inside, and by changing the internal flow path, a big hit type that allows a ball to pass (easily) through the probable change switch 65e3 during a big hit, A jackpot type in which a ball cannot pass (is difficult) through the probability changing switch 65e3 is provided. Then, by changing the ratio of the jackpot types that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 depending on whether the first special symbol is a jackpot or the second special symbol is a jackpot, the special symbol is changed to a certain state. And the rate of transition is variable. In other words, a configuration in which a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to shift to the positive change state than in a case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. More attention can be given to whether the ball enters the operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probable change state, as in the time saving state. That is, a probable state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and a probable state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. A plurality of probable states in which the rate of transition to the probable state is different depending on whether the first special symbol is a lottery or the second special symbol is a lottery, and the probabilistic state to be given also has a different degree of advantage. Is provided, it is possible to play a game aiming at a better state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 101 and FIG. In the fourth embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13, and the ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. It was configured to give a probable change state after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different in that the first variable winning device 65 is omitted. The same components as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133, the gaming properties of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in a normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game in which the second variable prize device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won is executed. In addition, depending on the type of the jackpot that has been won, the probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot by the special figure lottery after the end of the jackpot game will be a high probability, and further, a probability fluctuating game state (hereinafter referred to as a probable change state) in which the special figure lottery will be easily received Although the probability of a jackpot does not change, a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, a time-saving state) in which lottery of special figures is easily received is given.

  Here, the probable change state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probable state 1 in which the drawing of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probable state, and a probable state 2 in which the drawing of FIG. Is provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be acquired by one jackpot game, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is easy to shift to a gaming state in which the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game is large, and it is easy to win the jackpot.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probable change state 1 that is more probable than the regular game and the probable change state 2 that is more advantageous than the probable change state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probable change state is increased (it is easy to enter into the probable change state 1), and the player can easily experience the game state (probable change state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to experience the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the performance during the jackpot game or the probable change state, to make the game entertainable, and to reduce the rate of shifting to the probable change state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has shifted to the probable change state 2 with a sense of superiority, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game for the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 is also configured to be able to set the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the time saving state in the same manner as the above-described probable change state, and both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 Game state where special figure lottery is easy to be performed (balls easily enter the entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time reduction state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed substantially, and the time reduction state 2 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probable change state 1 and the probable change state 2 are set as the probable change state, and the time reduction states 1 and 2 are set as the time reduction states.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the gaming state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, a game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game) is performed. Be executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and is located near the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down to the sorting prize winning device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured such that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when a result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (general-purpose lottery) executed based on a ball passing through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 becomes a hit. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and is configured such that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting winning device 700 is different.

  Since the detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 81 of the above-described fourth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the sorting prize winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on winning in a win (normal drawing) as a result of the general drawing lottery. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning per ordinary drawing. The switching valve 702 operates as described above, and is operated so as to communicate with the first flow path 703 during other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706. The dropped ball enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 133, the first operation port 704 and the second operation port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the first operating port 704 is connected to a first operating accessory 645 a provided below the right area of the game board 13 by a first operating mechanism 705, and has entered the first operating port 704. When the ball presses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first actor 645a is configured to come into contact with the actor 645a to open.

  Then, the first operating accessory 645a is opened by the operation of the first operating mechanism 705, so that the right first ball entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entry opening 64a2, the lottery of the special drawing 1 is executed as in the case of the first entry opening 64a1, and the entered ball is placed at the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first operating accessory 645a is closed.

  As described above, the mechanism that changes the accessory into the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-motorized accessory. Although a detailed description of the configuration of the non-motorized accessory is omitted in the present embodiment, any technique that has already been disclosed may be appropriately employed.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 in the same manner as the configuration of the non-motorized accessory described above. The second actor 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entrance 64b, which can enter when the second actor 645b is in the open state, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageously than the special figure 1 can be performed. Be executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first Since the configuration is the same as that of the non-motorized accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, a detailed description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is set only for a predetermined period of time when the above-described switching valve 702 is selected, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after election per ordinary drawing (2 seconds). The first channel 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during the other periods (including a period in which no winning is performed per ordinary drawing). The first channel 703 is opened by flowing down the second channel 706. The special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is performed by the ball entering the second actor 645b, which prevents the special figure 2 lottery from being executed by an illegal game. That's why.

  Referring back to FIG. 133, the description of the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b enters a state in which the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 can enter the ball, the game board 13 does not enter the sorting prize winning device 700 and does not enter. The ball that has flowed down the right side area is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the entrances in which the ball can enter.

  In this manner, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed (probable change state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

  A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first channel 703 or the second channel 706 is provided in the sorting prize winning device 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds elapse after the winning per normal drawing. Regarding the operation control of the switching valve 702, a fixed operation is performed regardless of which open pattern is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 710.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a ball entering the distribution winning device 700 for each electric hand opening pattern. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric winning opening pattern, a period in which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second from the start of the game. The ball that entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds elapse as described above. At the timing when the ball arrives at the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the first flow path 1644 is in communication, and the ball is guided to the first flow path 1644. While the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 701 in this manner, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64a2. In other words, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric winning (electrically driven accessory), the gaming state (the time saving state 1, the probability changing state 1) in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 second after 1.5 seconds elapse after the jackpot win, but the opening for 0.1 second is an interval at which the ball is difficult to enter. And almost no ball enters. If a ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period, the ball enters the sorting winning prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

  Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern, a period in which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second after 1.5 seconds elapse from the start of the game. . The ball that entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds elapse as described above. At the timing when the ball arrives at the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the second flow path 706 is in communication, and the ball is guided to the second flow path 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is guided to the second flow path 706 and enters the second operating port 707. Acting on the ball, the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b. In other words, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric winning (electrically driven accessory), the gaming state (the time saving state 2, the probability changing state 2) in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 second after the jackpot is won. However, the opening for 0.1 second is a difficult interval for the ball to enter, and almost no ball enters. There is no ball. If a ball enters the distribution prize device 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern A described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled such that the ball that has entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball that has entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. This allows the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 to be guided to a desired flow path, and the ball is transferred from the sorting prize device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in a state where the fluctuation time of the general figure is shortened (a time saving state, a probable change state), the fluctuation time of the general figure is set to be 3 seconds. Therefore, in a state in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern, the switching valve 702 is set from the start of the normal drawing in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 to the second flow path. Even if the second flow path is placed in a state where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after the elapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path is brought into a state where the first flow path is communicated until the game is executed again after the next general figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 across a plurality of times per game is guided to an unintended flow path.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric utility (electric accessory) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric utility (electric accessory) is set. The game state where the special figure 1 fluctuates substantially and the game state where the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially can be set based on the. Furthermore, a special advantage (a larger number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game, which is substantially special) is more advantageous when the jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery than when the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 lottery. (The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed is high).

  As a result, the time saving state and the probable change state are further changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, probable changing state 2) and the player is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the normal game state. It is possible to provide a game state (a time saving state 1, a probability change state 1) which is a game state. Therefore, various game states can be set for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for transition from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, the player can easily see the effect performed in the time reduction state or the probability change state. Or by setting a low transition rate for shifting to the probable state 2 which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player so as to give the player who has shifted to the probable state 2 a sense of superiority. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

  In the fifth embodiment, the open pattern A and the open pattern B can be set as the open pattern of the electric combination (electrically-operated accessory). However, the type of the open pattern is not limited to this. Three or more types may be set. Thereby, it is possible to set more various game states.

  In the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening for guiding a sphere to the second flow path 706 are provided as opening patterns of the electric role (motorized accessory). A pattern (opening pattern B) is set. For example, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened at a timing when a ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Is also good. This allows the player to enjoy which flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, and further enhances the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured to enter one of the operation ports (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). A flow path is provided from the sorting and winning device 700 to the game board 13 again, or an outlet communicating with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering each operation port. A channel for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the ball in the sorting prize winning device 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined constant operation after the hit game is executed. For example, the constant operation is always performed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The configuration may be such that the number of the balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), thereby switching the communicating flow path.

  In the fifth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 is actuated by the contact of the switching valve 702 as a switching member with a ball, and a predetermined condition (for example, (Passing through 10 balls) may be configured to switch the communicating flow path.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the sphere guided to any one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 flows down the flow path and enters one of the working ports. A allocating member for allocating a sphere guided to any one of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere allocated to the specific flow path by the allocation member enters a corresponding working port. May be.

  In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As means for varying (extending) the time for a ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. A plurality of different paths may be provided, and a distributing means may be provided for distributing a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to any one of the paths. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a player who can play a game while predicting a timing at which a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 from being tired of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

  Next, transition of the gaming state in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing a transition of a game state in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 95, the pachinko machine 10 wins a normal gaming state, a probable change state 1 (unfavorable probable change), a probable change state 2 (advantageous probable change), a time reduction state 1 (unfavorable time reduction), and a time reduction state 2 (advantageous time reduction). It is configured to shift based on the big hit type.

  First, in the normal gaming state, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed. When a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability change state 1, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, and 15% shifts to the time reduction state 1 And 5% shift to the time saving state 2.

  Next, in the probable change state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric hand opening pattern, a game in which the change of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the special figure 1 substantial change). In the probability change state 1, when the jackpot is won, the probability change state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% transitions to the probability reduction state 2, 15% transitions to the time reduction state 1, and 5% transitions to the time reduction state 2. As described above, the probability change state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates similarly to the normal game state, and thus differs in that the jackpot probability is set higher than in the normal game state. The state transition destination and its distribution are the same.

  In the probable change state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric hand opening pattern, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the special figure 2 substantial fluctuation). In the probability change state 2, when the jackpot is won, the probability change state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% is shifted to the time reduction state 2, and 5% is shifted to the time reduction state 1. As described above, the probable change state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially, and is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state. Becomes

  Next, in the time saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric hand opening pattern, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the special figure 1 substantial fluctuation). In the time-saving state 1, when a jackpot is won, the state shifts to the probability changing state 1 at 50%, 30% shifts to the probability changing state 2, 15% loops through the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. As described above, since the time reduction state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates similarly to the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the general figure is reduced, and the electric accessory 701 at the time of the general figure is shortened. Although the opening pattern is different from the normal gaming state, the destination of the gaming state after the jackpot winning and the distribution thereof are the same.

  In the time-saving state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the power-operating opening pattern, a game in which the change of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates). In the time reduction state 2, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to the probability change state 2 at 80%, 15% loops the time reduction state 2, and 5% shifts to the time reduction state 1. As described above, the time saving state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially, and the probability of shifting to the probable change state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won is the normal game state. The game state is set to 2.5 times or more (a so-called pullback zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player shifts to the most advantageous game state (probable change state 2) than the normal game state, and to motivate the player to play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, the game state transition destination after the big hit and the transition distribution ratio in each game state set in the fifth embodiment may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time-saving state that shifts from the normal game state may be only the time-saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of a player who has not been able to shift to the certainty change state in spite of winning the jackpot in the normal game state to decrease.

  In the fifth embodiment, the transition destination and distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state may be changed according to the game state. The transfer destination and the transfer distribution rate may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game characteristics, and it is possible to suppress an early tiredness of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the probable change state is configured to continue until the next big hit, and 10 time savings are given as the time saving state regardless of the gaming state. The specification is continued until the number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure changes, and by winning the lottery, the state is changed from the certain change state to the normal game state. It may be configured to shift. In this case, as the probable change state that is advantageous to the player and the probable change state that is disadvantageous, for example, a difference is provided in the number of times of the change of the special symbol in which the probable change state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probable change state to the normal game state is changed. Or you may make it.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. First, the electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, the fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the accessory motor 270 is omitted.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, It has a symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a jackpot flag 203i, a probable change flag 203r, a time reduction counter 203r, an electric activity opening pattern storage area 203y, and another memory area 203z. are doing.

  Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the jackpot flag 203i, the probability change flag 203r, and the other memory area 203z are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. The time reduction counter 203r is the same as that provided in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment or the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The electric-power release pattern storage area 203y is an area for storing the electric-power release pattern stored in the electric-power release pattern table 202de. The electric accessory 701 is moved based on the electric-operator opening pattern stored in the electric-operator opening pattern storage area 203y.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and an electric hand opening pattern table 202de. ing. Note that the tables other than the first hit type selection table 202b and the electric power release pattern table 202de are the same as those in the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description is omitted. Although omitted from the drawing, the electric-power opening pattern table 202de is a storage area in which an operation pattern (electric-power opening pattern) for moving the electric accessory 701 is stored.

  Next, the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 and the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 that constitute the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing the details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 which is referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 of the present embodiment, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “big hit A” is set as the big hit type. Are associated with each other. The “big hit A” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, a certain change state is given after the big hit, and the open pattern A is set as the electrical winning open pattern. "Big hit B" is associated as a big hit type in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "50 to 79". The “big hit B” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, a positive change state is given after the big hit, and the open pattern B is set as the electrical winning open pattern. "Big hit C" is associated as a big hit type in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 94". The "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric winning opening pattern. "Big hit D" is associated with the big hit type in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "95 to 99". The "big hit D" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four, only the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 that is referred to when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the special figure 2 type selection table 202b2 of this embodiment, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 74”, “big hit E” is set as the big hit type. Are associated with each other. This “big hit E” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a probable change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern. "Big hit F" is associated with the big hit type in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "75 to 79". The “big hit F” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two, a probable change state is given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric role opening pattern. "Big hit C" is associated with the big hit type in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "80 to 84". When the winning of the second special symbol is "big hit C", the number of rounds is four, only seven time saving states are given after the big hit, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric winning opening pattern. "Big hit D" is associated with the big hit type in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "95 to 99". When the winning of the second special symbol is “big hit D”, the number of rounds is four, only seven time saving states are given after the big hit, and the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 99, the special symbol variation process 5 (S164) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 5 (S164). This special symbol variation process 4 (S164) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment, and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37. And a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  The special symbol variation process 5 (S164) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the fourth embodiment in that the subtraction process of the positive variation counter 203g is not performed. The difference is that an open pattern storage area is set, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (S164), the processes of S201 to S217 are executed as in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 86). If it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S217: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S218), and the round number corresponding to the big hit type is set in the round counter. It is set (S281), and the round start flag is set to ON (S282). Then, the start of the big hit is set (S220), the counter 203r during time saving is reset to 0 (S283), the electric power release opening pattern storage area 203y is cleared (S284), and the process proceeds to S222.

  On the other hand, in the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S217: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203r during time reduction is greater than 0 (S272). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203r is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S213), and the process proceeds to S282.

  In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203r is 0 (S272: No), the power-use opening pattern A is stored in the power-use opening pattern storage area 203y (S285), and this process is performed. To end. As described above, in the case of the electrical activity opening pattern A, the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is guided to the first operating port 704. That is, a game ball enters the right first entry opening 64a2, and a state is executed in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a special symbol 2 change start process 5 (FIG. 100, S208) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process 5 (S208). This special symbol 2 change start process 5 (S208) is different from the special symbol 2 change start process (see FIG. 14) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the change pattern table corresponding to the gaming state. And the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol 2 change start process 5 (S208), the processes of S301 to S305 are executed as in the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 14) in the fourth embodiment. In the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S305: No), a display mode of the out is set (S308), and based on the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the current game state. The variation pattern is determined (S381), and the process proceeds to S310.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation (normal) variation pattern table and the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probable variation gaming state, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table and the variation type counter CS1. When the gaming state is the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the time reduction state. As a result, a variation pattern according to the game state can be set.

  Next, the details of the special symbol 1 change start process 5 (FIG. 101, S213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process 5 (S213). This special symbol 1 change start process 5 (S213) is different from the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 15) in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the change pattern table corresponding to the gaming state. And the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, detailed description thereof will be omitted, and differences are the same as in the special symbol 2 change start process 5 (see FIG. 100) described above. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, details of the prefetching process 5 (S513) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513). In the prefetching process 5 (see FIG. 102), in each of the processes of S601 and S672, the same process as the prefetching process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment is executed.

  In the pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 102) of the fifth embodiment, when S672 ends, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S681), and the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination value ("0") at the time of low probability (normal game state) is included in the jackpot determination value ("0 to 9") at the time of high probability (probable change game state). Therefore, even if the lottery result is pre-read in the normal gaming state and then the game mode is shifted to the probable changing gaming state, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the lottery result changes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S106). The ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S106) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, and includes a variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device, This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 701 attached to the passage opening 701a.

  Of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103), in the processes of S701 to S713 and S718 to S725, S701 to S713 and S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 88) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S725 to S725 is executed.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103), when the process of S713 is completed, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set based on the opening pattern stored in the electrical opening opening pattern storage area 203y. (S781), and the process proceeds to S719. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 103) of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S725 is completed, the operation of the switching valve is set, and the process is completed (S782).

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (S1105). The jackpot control process 5 (S1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state. is there.

  In the big hit control process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on (S1301). In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is off (S1301: No), the big hit control does not need to be performed, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is on (S1301: Yes), then, it is determined whether the round start flag is on (S1381). The mouth (large open mouth) 65a is opened (S1382), the round start flag is set to off (S1383), a round number command indicating a new round to be started is set (S1384), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1381 that the round start flag is off (S1381: No), it is determined whether the conditions for closing the large opening are satisfied (S1385). If the conditions are satisfied (S1385: Yes), The large opening is closed (S1386), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1487), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large opening is not satisfied (S1385: No), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is 0 (S1388), and if it is 0 (S1388: No), the round start flag is turned on. Is set to (S1389), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1388 that the value of the round counter is not 0 (S1388), the jackpot flag 203i is set to off (S1390), and the electrical jackoff pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is opened. It is read out from the pattern table 202de and stored in the electric utility opening pattern storage area 203y (S1391). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probable jackpot (S1392). If the jackpot is a probable jackpot (S1392: Yes), the probable change flag 203r is set to ON (S1393), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1392 that the game is a normal jackpot (S1392: No), the probability change flag 203r is set to off (S1394), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 that can enter the ball when the winning is achieved by the general drawing lottery is performed by the switching valve 702 through the first flow path 703 or The ball is distributed to any one of the second flow paths 706 and enters one of the first working port 704 and the second working port 707. When a ball enters each of the operating ports (704, 707), the corresponding operating accessory (645a, 645b) is opened. By opening the first actor 645a, the right first ball entry port 64a2 can enter the ball, and by opening the second actor 645b, the right second ball entry port 64b can enter the ball. Becomes

  An opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which a ball is guided to the first flow path 703 as an opening pattern of the slide member (electric unit) 710 of the sorting prize winning device 700 according to a jackpot type when a jackpot is won by a special drawing lottery. And an open pattern (open pattern B) for guiding the sphere to the second flow path 706. That is, a game state in which the special figure 1 fluctuates substantially and a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially are set based on the opening pattern of the electric utility (electrically-operated goods) set based on the jackpot type. be able to. Furthermore, a special advantage (a larger number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game, which is substantially special) is more advantageous when the jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery than when the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 lottery. (The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed is high).

  As a result, the time saving state and the probable change state are further changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, probable changing state 2) and the player is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the normal game state. It is possible to provide a game state (a time saving state 1, a probability change state 1) which is a game state. Therefore, various game states can be set for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the open pattern A and the open pattern B can be set as the open pattern of the electric combination (electrically-operated accessory). However, the type of the open pattern is not limited to this. Three or more types may be set. Thereby, it is possible to set more various game states.

  In the fifth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern for guiding a sphere to the second flow path 706 are provided as opening patterns of the electric role (electrically driven accessory). A pattern (opening pattern B) is set. For example, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened at a timing when a ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Is also good. This allows the player to enjoy which flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, and further enhances the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, the same configuration as that of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above is used. In the above-described fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a large amount of game value is provided by a game ball entering a specific winning opening 650a provided in the second variable winning device 650 (one ball). 15 balls are paid out per winning), and the ball passes through the variable switch 65e3 provided in the variable prize device 65 which is opened during a part of the jackpot period, whereby the variable game state is given. The pachinko machine 10 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a small hit is provided separately from the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery, and when the small hit occurs, the specific winning port 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 is provided. The opening and closing door 65f1 is configured to be opened and closed. Further, a special winning opening 650a different from the variable winning device 65a is provided, and when a big hit occurs, the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed. Hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 that enables a game ball to enter when a small hit occurs will be referred to as a first variable winning device 65, and a specific winning port 65a provided in the first variable winning device 65 will be referred to as a first winning device 65a. This will be referred to as a special winning opening 65a. In addition, the variable winning device 650 that enables a game ball to enter when a big hit occurs is referred to as a second variable winning device 650, and the specific winning port 650 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is second specified. It is referred to as a winning opening 650.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65, so that the variable probability gaming state is provided.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the probability changing switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is referred to as a jackpot switch 65e3, and a jackpot is provided based on the passing of the game ball through the jackpot switch 65e3. Configured.

  As a result, when a small hit occurs, a game ball can enter the variable winning device 65, and when the game ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3, a large hit is provided. Therefore, even if a small hit occurs, there is a possibility that a large hit may be given thereafter, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the characteristic playability in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, two types of opportunities for executing the jackpot game are provided. One is a jackpot executed by winning a jackpot by lottery of a special symbol, and the other is a jackpot. Is a jackpot that is executed when the ball passes the jackpot switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 during the small jackpot game as a result of the special symbol lottery.

  As described above, the pachinko machine having the gaming property in which the jackpot game is executed by two kinds of triggers, such as the special symbol lottery result and the ball passing in the specific area (big hit switch 65e3) within the specific period (small hitting period). The machine 10 is called a one-type two-type mixer.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a gaming state (a so-called probability variation state (hereinafter, referred to as a probable change state)) in which a special symbol big hit probability or a normal symbol hit probability is higher than usual is provided. After the jackpot game, the change time of the special figure and the general figure is shortened, and furthermore, the electric figure (electric part) 701 whose operation is controlled when the large figure is won as a result of the general figure lottery is determined. A time-saving gaming state in which the opening pattern is changed (hereinafter, referred to as a time-saving state) is provided.

  In the one-type and two-type mixer configured as described above, for example, the special hitting probability is not changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 so that the small hitting probability is set to be higher in the special figure 2. By making it easier for the lottery of the special figure 2 to be performed during the time reduction state, the jackpot probability during the time reduction state can be set higher than during the normal game. Further, by setting the opening pattern of the electric auditorium (electric) 701 in the time saving state to an opening pattern in which it is easier to enter the sorting prize winning device 700 than in the normal game, the jackpot game is further executed. The probability can be increased.

  Further, the opening pattern of the specific door 65f1 when the small hit is won is changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the ratio of selecting the advantageous opening pattern among the predetermined opening patterns is shown in FIG. 2). Is set higher than the small hit in the special figure 1), it is possible to set the probability of executing the big hit game in the time saving state higher than in the normal game state.

  In the time saving state given after the end of the jackpot, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the first time saving state in which the variation of Toku-zu 1 is substantially executed and the variation of Toku-zu 2 are substantially executed. The second time-saving state is set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, details will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b), but the jackpot game won by the lottery of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 A game (a jackpot game in which the player can acquire a large number of balls during the jackpot game) is configured to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to set a more advantageous state (second time reduction state) and an unfavorable state (first time reduction state) in the time reduction state more advantageous than the normal gaming state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of stages of the game state (normal game state, first time reduction state, second time reduction state) according to the degree of advantage to the player in the game state, and It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from getting tired early.

  Note that the structure in the distribution winning device 700 and the mechanism by which the first operating character 645a and the second operating character 645b operate are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has been described above, it is determined whether a game ball passes the jackpot switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 (whether it is easy to pass) or not. It may be changed by the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the opening 65a.

  For example, when "small hit A" is selected, the door (attacker) 65f of the first variable prize device 65 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an open pattern in which the game balls can easily enter the first variable prize device 65. Set the release scenario to release for 5 seconds. On the other hand, when "small hit B" is selected, the ball is set to an open pattern in which the ball is difficult to win in the first variable winning device 65, and the door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is set to 0. An opening scenario in which the operation of opening for one second is performed three times may be set.

  As described above, the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 65f during the small hit game is made different depending on each small hit type, so that the small hit game which is advantageous to the player in the small hit game in which the first variable winning device 650 is opened is advantageous. It is possible to set an appropriate small hit and provide a variety of playability.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a bonus after the jackpot game, the time-saving game state is provided according to the jackpot type. However, another privilege may be provided as a bonus provided after the jackpot game. For example, for example, a high probability state in which the special jackpot probability or the small jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than the normal game state may be given for a predetermined period. As the predetermined period in this case, a period until the next jackpot is won, a period until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or a transition to the normal game state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). The period from when a lottery is performed to when the lottery is won can be considered. In addition, as other benefits, a bonus that increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the normal gaming state, and an opening pattern of each winning device executed in a big hit game or a small hit game are changed to an opening pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits are possible.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 119. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), the first hit random number table 202a defines a big hit determination value corresponding to the symbol type and the value of the first hit random number counter C1. Specifically, when the symbol type is the special map 1, the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is any other value, it is determined to be out.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the special figure 2, it is determined that the first random number counter C1 is “0” when the value of the random number counter C1 is “0”, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “1 to 399”, the small random number is small. It is determined to be a hit. As described above, the special figure 1 is not determined to be a small hit, and the special figure 2 is not determined to be out of order.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first big hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 as the determination value of the big hit A corresponding to FIG. “50 to 99” is set as the determination value. Further, the value "0-49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the jackpot C determination value and "50-99" as the jackpot D determination value corresponding to the special map 2. The details of the jackpot C and the jackpot D will be described later. However, the jackpot C and the jackpot D are also referred to when the small jackpot type is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed when the ball passes through the jackpot switch 65e3.

  Here, when the jackpot game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the opening / closing 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large number of prize balls are obtained by allowing game balls to enter the first specific winning opening 65a. Game to be executed. In addition, a time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player is provided after the end of the big hit game according to the big hit type.

  Next, the content of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize device 65 opens four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state 1 (an electric-charge opening pattern A is set as a time-saving state). Time saving state) is given until the special figure fluctuates 100 times (100 time savings).

  When the jackpot B is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize device 65 opens four rounds (4R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state 2 (an electric-charge opening pattern B is set as a time-saving state). Time saving state) is given until the special figure fluctuates 100 times (100 time savings).

  When the big hit C is selected, a big hit game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the big hit game is completed, the time saving state 1 (the electric charge opening pattern A is set as the time saving state). Time saving state) is given until the special figure fluctuates 100 times (100 time savings).

  When the jackpot D is selected, a jackpot game in which the first variable prize device 65 opens 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state 2 (the electric act opening pattern B is set as the time saving state). Time saving state) is given until the special figure fluctuates 100 times (100 time savings).

  Next, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the value of the second random number counter C4 is “5 to 204”, it is determined that a hit has occurred.

  The opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are set in the electric activity opening pattern table 202ea as in the above-described fourth embodiment. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the first small hit type selection table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 106 (d), the first small hit type selection table 202eb is a table in which the relationship between the value of the first hit type counter value C2 and the selected small hit is specified.

  Specifically, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, the small hit A is selected. The small hit A has one round and the attacker (the first specific winning opening 65a) has an opening time of 1.5 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a passes through the big hit. By passing through the switch 65e3, a small hit is given a big hit C.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the small hit B is selected. The small hit B has one round and the attacker (first specific winning opening 65a) has an opening time of 1.5 seconds, and the game ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a passes through the big hit. By passing through the switch 65e3, a small hit is given a big hit D.

<Control processing of main controller in sixth embodiment>
Next, differences between the control processing of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment and the control processing of the main control device 110 in the above-described fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment executes a process capable of assigning a probable change state. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment does not have a probable change state. The difference is that a small hit is added and a control regarding the small hit is added.

  Specifically, a special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 107) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 4, and a normal symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 108) is executed instead of the ordinary symbol variation process. In that the big hit control process 6 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the big hit control process 4 in the main process (see FIG. 110), and the small hit control process (see FIG. 113) is added. Different. The other configuration is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. The special symbol variation process 6 in the sixth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation process 4 in the fourth embodiment in that processes from S291 to S296 are added and that some processes are deleted. I have. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the fourth embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation process 6 is executed, the processes of S201 to S217 are executed as in the special symbol variation process 4. If it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery is a big hit (S217: Yes), the opening flag 203v is set to ON (S241), the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S220), and the counter during the working hours is reduced. 203u is reset to 0 (S292), and the process proceeds to S222.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S217: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S293). When it is determined in the process of S293 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S293: Yes), a small hit setting process is executed (S294). A detailed description of the small hit setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the process of S294 is completed, or if it is determined in the process of S293 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S293: No), then, similarly to the special symbol variation process 4, S272, S273 Is performed. After the process of S273 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203cr during working hours is 0 (S295), and if it is determined that the value of the counter is 0 (S295: Yes), the power-use release pattern is stored. The release pattern A is stored in the area 203ee, and the flow shifts to S282 described above. If it is determined in step S295 that the value of the counter is not 0, the process of step S245 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S282. Then, when the process ends in S282, the present process ends.

  Next, the small hit setting process (S294) will be described with reference to FIG. When the small hit setting process is executed, first, the small hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table (S4501), and an open scenario is set based on the small hit type (S4502). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203ed is set to ON (S4503), and the small hit opening flag 203ec is set to ON. Then, the big hit type at the time of passing V is set according to the small hit type (S4505), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the ordinary symbol variation process 6 (S106) will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 6 is different from the above-described ordinary symbol variation process 3 of the fourth embodiment in that the process relating to the high probability state (probable variation state) of the ordinary symbol has been deleted and the content of the detailed operation control has been changed. It differs in the point, and the other configuration is the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the ordinary symbol variation process 6 (S106) is executed, the processes of S701 to S707 are executed as in the ordinary symbol variation process 3. After finishing the process of S707, next, a lottery result based on the random number table per symbol (second random number table) 202c is acquired (S791). With reference to the lottery result acquired in the process of S791, the processes of S712 to S715, S717 and S718 are executed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process 3.

  In the process of S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are next based on the table stored in the electric winning opening pattern storage area 203ee. Is set (S792). After finishing the process of S792, it is next determined whether or not the time is currently reduced (S719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203cr is larger than 0. If it is determined in the processing of S719 that the current time is being reduced (S719: Yes), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S719 that the current time is not reduced (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 180 seconds (S721), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S702 executed in the ordinary symbol variation process 6 in FIG. 123, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is currently varying (S702: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time has elapsed. (S722). When it is determined in the processing of S722 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S722 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S722: Yes), the processing of S723 to S725 is executed similarly to the normal symbol fluctuation processing 3, and the operation of the switching valve 702 is set ( S793), this process ends.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment does not have a certainty changing function, it is impossible to change the probability of hitting the ordinary figure. Therefore, there is a large difference between the normal game state and the time-short game state in the fluctuation time of the normal figure (the normal game state is 180 seconds and the time-short state is 3 seconds), and further, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is changed. In addition, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can be set.

  Next, a main process 6 executed by the main control device 110 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 6 of the sixth embodiment is different from the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment in that the content of the big hit control process 3 is changed and that a small hit control process (S1191) is added. , And other configurations are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the main process 6 is executed, the processes of S1161 to S1165 are executed similarly to the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot control process 5 is executed in the process of S1165, and a detailed description thereof will be given later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1165 is completed, next, a small hit control process is executed (S1191). The small hit control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the process of S1191 ends, the processes of S1166 to S1176 are executed as in the main process 5 of the fourth embodiment, and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1165) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. When the jackpot control process 5 (S1165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the opening flag 203v is on (S1391). If it is determined in the processing of S1391 that the opening flag 203v is on (S1391: Yes), then the opening flag 203v is set to off (S1392), and an opening command is set (S1372) to correspond to the jackpot type. The release pattern is set (S1393), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1391 that the opening flag is not on (S1391: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203eb is on (S1301). If it is determined in S1301 that the big hit flag is not on (S1301: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203eb is on (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394). If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S1394: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON to open the second variable winning device 650 (S1395), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1394, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1394: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1378), and it is determined that it is the timing of starting the ending effect. In this case (S1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (S1379). If it is determined in S1378 that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1378: No), or if the process of S1379 ends, the process ends.

  Next, the ending process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. In this ending process, the processes of S4101 to S4195 are executed as shown in FIG. 112, and a gaming state (whether or not to reduce the time saving state) provided after the end of the big hit and a release pattern of the electric hand are set.

  Specifically, it is determined based on the regulation contents set for each of the jackpot types in the first jackpot type selection table 202b. For example, when the current jackpot is the jackpot A in Tokujin 1 Is set to 100 (S4193), and the pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern (S4194).

  As described above, the time-saving state and the power-release pattern during the time-saving state can be set based on the specified contents (presence / absence of time, power-release pattern) set corresponding to the jackpot type. In addition, it is possible to easily set the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 during the time saving state.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1191) executed in the main process 6 (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit control process (S1191) is a process for controlling from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit, and particularly, the ball passes through the big hit switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit. This is characterized by the control of giving the big hit game that is given by this to the small hit game end.

  When the small hit control process (S1191) is executed, the processes of S4601 to S4611 are executed as shown in FIG. 113, and thereafter, the same process as the abnormal process 4 executed in the fourth embodiment is executed. . In detail, the same processing as S1061 to S1670 shown in FIG. 89 is executed, and instead of the processing of S1671, the winning number counter 203t2 and the discharge number counter 203t8 are reset, and this processing ends.

  In the above-described small hit control process (S1191), the process of opening the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 at a predetermined timing (for example, 0.2 seconds after the start of the small hit) (S4605 and S4606). After a lapse of a predetermined period from the opening of the opening / closing door 65f1 (for example, a small hit is started as a period necessary for the ball entering the first variable prize device 65 to reach the flow path switching member 65h). (After 0.5 seconds), the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on to operate the flow path switching member 65h provided in the first variable winning device 65 to switch the flow path (S4607 to S4608). .

  As described above, by performing the operation control of the various devices (the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path switching member 65h) executed during the small hit by a series of controls, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the operation timing of the various devices. It is possible to provide an appropriate small hit game. Various operation controls executed in the small hit control are defined in one release scenario, the release scenario is updated by a counter that is counted at a fixed cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the updated release scenario is updated. Various operation controls may be executed based on the content. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the error in the timing at which various operation controls are executed.

  Next, the small hit prize winning process (S4611) executed in the small hit control process (S1191) will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit prize processing (S4611) executes various processing based on the balls that have entered the first variable prize device 65 during the small hit period. Regarding the specific contents, the same processing as the winning processing 3 (S1270 in FIG. 88) executed in the above-described fourth embodiment is executed. The difference between the small hit prize processing (S4611) and the third prize processing (S1270) is that, in the fourth embodiment, the first variable prize device 65 is opened during the big hit game and provided in the first variable prize device 65. In the sixth embodiment, the first variable prize device 65 is opened during the small hit, and the first variable winning device 65 is opened. Since the jackpot is given by passing the ball through the jackpot switch 65e3 which is a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, the names of the various components are changed as shown in FIG. 114. is there.

  When the small hit prize processing S4611 is executed, the processing of S4701 to S4721 is executed as shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the V passing large hit setting process (S4711) will be described. When the V-passing jackpot setting process (S4711) is executed, the jackpot type is first determined based on the V-passing jackpot type value Β1 (S4801), and then an open scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S4802). . Thereby, the big hit is executed after the small hit is completed.

  Next, the small hit prize winning completion processing (S4721) will be described with reference to FIG. When the small hit prize completion processing (S4721) is executed, first, it is determined whether the big hit setting flag 203β2 is on (S4901). If it is determined in step S4901 that the jackpot setting flag 203β2 is ON (S4901: Yes), then the jackpot flag 203eb is set ON (S4902), and the opening flag 203v is set ON (S4903). , To S4904.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the big hit setting flag 203β2 has been set to off, the flow shifts to S4904. In S4904, the jackpot type value at the time of passing V is cleared, and this processing ends.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided as the time-saving state provided in the case of a big hit. That is, a time-saving state 1 (probable change state 1) where it is difficult to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player when a jackpot occurs, and a time-saving state 2 (where the jackpot type advantageous to the player is easily selected when a jackpot occurs) Probable change state 2) was provided. By diversifying the gaming state by the plurality of time saving states, the interest of the player is improved.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, not only the degree of advantage of each time-saving state is varied, but also the time-saving period of the time-saving state provided according to the gaming state in the case of a big hit is made different. Thus, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the time reduction period continues for a long time can be made different depending on the game state, so that the time reduction period given in consideration of the game state can be predicted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed. And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 117A, in the present embodiment, a time saving number selection table 202h is provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment. This time reduction number selection table 202h is a data table for selecting a time reduction number according to a gaming state as a time reduction state of a normal symbol set after the end of a special symbol when a special symbol is a big hit. The time saving number selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving number selection table 202h. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the time-saving number selection table 202h defines the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the big hit in association with the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit.

  Specifically, if the winning jackpot is one of the jackpots A and B and the gaming state at the time of the winning is the normal state (non-probable non-time saving state), 50 times are set as the time saving period. That is, in the case of the jackpot A, 50 time saving states 1 are set after the end of the jackpot, and 100 times of the special symbol change state are basically provided (if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot). Is done. In other words, 50 times after the jackpot A ends, the probability change state 1 occurs, and between 51 and 100 times, the probability change non-time saving state (latency probability change state) occurs. When the latent probability is changed, it is usually difficult to hit the symbol, so that the number of possessed balls tends to decrease. Therefore, since it is disadvantageous compared to the probable change state 1, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the jackpot will be regained during the probable change state 1. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the game. In the case of the jackpot B, 50 time saving states 2 are set after the end of the jackpot, and basically, if the jackpot has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol is given 100 times. You. In other words, 50 times after the jackpot B is completed, the state changes to the probable change state 2, and between 51 and 100 times, the state changes to the probable change non-time saving state (latency probable change state). In the latent probability change state, the pattern is normally hard to hit, and even if the pattern hits, the open pattern A is set (open pattern in which the ball easily enters the first working port 704), so that the probability change state is set. It is disadvantageous compared to 2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous about the game once to 50 times after the end of the jackpot B.

  If the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the latent probability change state (probability change non-time saving state), the time reduction state is given 100 times. That is, in the case of the big hit A, the probability change state 1 is basically given 100 times, and in the case of the big hit B, the probability change state 2 is basically given 100 times. Therefore, since the state is not switched to the latent probability change state, the game can be performed with confidence until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a long time reduction period is selected in the latent probability change state, discouragement for switching from the probability change state 1 or the probability change state 2 to the latent probability change state is reduced, and the jackpot A or the jackpot during the latent probability change state is reduced. You can make B want to win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to play the game during the latency change state.

  If the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2 (non-probable variable time saving state), the time saving state is awarded 30 times. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot A, the state is switched to the 70-latency probability change state after 30 times the probability change state 1. Further, in the case of the jackpot B, the state is switched to the latent probability change state 70 times after the probability change state 30 times.

  If the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won in the probable change state 1 or the probable change state 2 (probable change time saving state), the time reduction state is given 20 times. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot A, the state is switched to the latent probability change state 80 times after the probability change state 20 times. In the case of the jackpot B, the state is switched to the latent probability change state 80 times after the probability change state 20 times.

  In addition, even when the jackpots C and D are won, the distribution of the number of time savings is made different according to the gaming state at the time of the winning. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot C or D in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time saving state), 100 time saving periods are given. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, 100 time saving states 1 are given, and in the case of the big hit D, 100 time saving states 2 are given. The reason for setting a relatively long time reduction period in the normal state is to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantageous. In other words, in the normal state which is the most disadvantageous for the player, there is a possibility that the jackpot is not given the probable change state, and if the time is shortened until the time is reduced, the motivation of the player for the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting a relatively long time-saving period, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from being reduced.

  Similarly, if the jackpots C and D are won in the latent probability change state (probability change non-time saving state), no time reduction period is given. That is, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. As described above, when the jackpots A and B occur in the latent probability change state, a relatively long (100 times) time saving period is selected. On the other hand, in the jackpots C and D, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, and in the latent probability change state, the degree of advantage of the player differs greatly depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability change state, the big hit type can be noticed more. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the case of the jackpot C or D in the time saving state 1 or the time saving state 2, 30 time saving periods are given. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, 30 time saving states 1 are given, and in the case of the big hit D, 30 time saving states 2 are given. Further, when the jackpots C and D occur in the probability change state 1 or the probability change state 2, ten time-saving periods are given. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C, ten time saving states 1 are given, and in the case of the big hit D, ten time saving states 2 are given.

  On the other hand, when the big hits F to H (big hits by the lottery of the second special symbol) are reached, the same time reduction period is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if any of the jackpots E and F is reached, 100 time reduction periods are given regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if any of the jackpots G and H is reached, 20 time saving periods are given regardless of the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the time reduction provided depends on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. With this configuration, the jackpot to be won can be varied according to the game state. That is, the degree of advantage of each jackpot can be varied according to the game state, so that more various game characteristics can be realized.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, a winning state storage area 203γ is provided in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. The winning state storage area 203γ is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of the jackpot at the time of the start of the jackpot. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203γ is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a time reduction period at the end of the jackpot. That is, at the end of the jackpot, the number of time reductions corresponding to the game state indicated by the information stored in the winning time state storage area 203γ is read from the above-mentioned time reduction number selection table 202h, and the value of the time reduction counter 203cr is read. Is set. Note that the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control process of main controller in seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 119, a special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119), in each of the processes of S201 to S273, the same processes as those of S201 to S273 of the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 75) in the fourth embodiment are respectively performed. Be executed. Further, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 119) in the present embodiment, when the process of S218 is completed, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and the information corresponding to the winning state storage area 203γ is stored. Is executed (S299), and the processing after S220 is executed. Details of the winning state determination processing (S299) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the winning state determination processing (S299). When the winning state determination processing (see FIG. 120) is started, first, the values of the probability change counter 203ce and the time reduction counter 203cr are read (S5001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read probability change counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S5002), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (not in the probability change state) (S5002: No), It is determined whether the value of the middle counter 203cr is larger than 0 (S5003).

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203cr during the time reduction is 0 (not in the time reduction state) (S5003: No), it is determined that the gaming state has won the jackpot in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time reduction state). Therefore, “00H”, which is a value indicating the non-probable variable non-saving time state, is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5004), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203cr during the working hours is larger than 0 (S5003: Yes), a big hit occurs in one of the working hours 1 and the working hours 2 (non-probable variable working hours). Since it means that the game has been won, the value “01H” indicating the non-probable change time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5005), and this processing ends.

  Also, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203ce is larger than 0 (S5002: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the counter 203cr during working hours is larger than 0 (S5006). If it is determined that it is 0 (not in the time saving state) (S5006: No), it means that a big hit has occurred in the latent probability change state (probability variable non-time saving state). The information is stored in the state storage area 203γ (S5007), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5006, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203cr during the working hours is greater than 0 (S5006: Yes), it means that the jackpot has been hit in either the probable state 1 or the probable state 2; “03H” indicating the probable change time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203γ (S5008), and this processing ends.

  At the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined by referring to the value stored in the winning state storage area 203γ, and the number of times reduced is selected. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of time reductions in accordance with the game state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the ending process 7 (S1379) will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process 7 (S1379) is a process executed in place of the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87) in the fourth embodiment, and like the ending process 3 (see FIG. 87), the jackpot ending and the jackpot. This is a process for setting a later gaming state.

  When the ending process 7 (see FIG. 121) is started, first, an ending command for starting an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S4101). Next, the big hit is set by turning off the big hit flag 203ct (S4102). Next, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203cf is on (S4103). If it is on (S4103: Yes), 100 is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ce (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105. I do. As a result, it is possible to set the special symbol change state 100 times after the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203cf is off (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the current big hit is one of the big hits A, C, E, and G (S4105). That is, it is determined whether the type is the jackpot type to which the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot, and if it is determined to be any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (S4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203cs is set. On the other hand, 0 is set (S4106), and the process shifts to S4191. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4105 that the jackpot is not any of the jackpots A, C, E, or G (any of the jackpots B, D, F, or H) (S4105: No), the time saving identification is performed. The flag 203cs is set to 1 (S4107), and the process shifts to S4191.

  In the processing of S4191 executed after the processing of S4106 or S4107, the values stored in the time saving number selection table 202h and the winning state storage area 203γ are read (S4191), and the read winning state storage area 203γ is stored. The number of savings indicated by the value and the current jackpot type is specified from the savings number selection table 202h (S4192). Then, the specified number of times saved is set in the during-hours counter 203cr (S4193), and the present process ends.

  By executing the ending process, it is possible to set various time savings in accordance with the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of time reductions in accordance with the game state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage is different between a case where a jackpot is won by a lottery of a first special symbol and a case where a jackpot is won by a lottery of a second special symbol. 2 It is configured such that a player who wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. The time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance opening 64a2), and the time-saving state 2 is a lottery of the second special symbol. (The ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of saving in the time saving state given after the end of the big hit is made different according to the gaming state. Thus, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the time reduction period continues for a long time can be made different depending on the game state, so that the time reduction period given in consideration of the game state can be predicted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, all or a part of each embodiment and each control example described above may be combined.

  Next, a game board 13 of a pachinko machine according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a view showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as compared to the first embodiment, the configuration of the sorting prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b. The difference is that the configuration for the ball to enter is changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the gaming properties of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in a normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game in which the second variable prize device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won is executed. In addition, depending on the type of the jackpot that has been won, the probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot by the special figure lottery after the end of the jackpot game will be a high probability, and further, a probability fluctuating game state (hereinafter referred to as a probable change state) in which the special figure lottery will be easily received Although the probability of a jackpot does not change, a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, a time-saving state) in which lottery of special figures is easily received is given.

  Here, the probable change state of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probable state 1 in which the drawing of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probable state, and a probable state 2 in which the drawing of FIG. Is provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be acquired by one jackpot game, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is easy to shift to a gaming state in which the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game is large, and it is easy to win the jackpot.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probable change state 1 that is more probable than the regular game and the probable change state 2 that is more advantageous than the probable change state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probable change state is increased (it is easy to enter into the probable change state 1), and the player can easily experience the game state (probable change state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to experience the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the performance during the jackpot game or the probable change state, to make the game entertainable, and to reduce the rate of shifting to the probable change state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has shifted to the probable change state 2 with a sense of superiority, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game for the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 is also configured to be able to set the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the time saving state in the same manner as the above-described probable change state, and both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 Game state where special figure lottery is easy to be performed (balls easily enter the entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time reduction state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed substantially, and the time reduction state 2 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probable change state 1 and the probable change state 2 are set as the probable change state, and the time reduction states 1 and 2 are set as the time reduction states.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. When the gaming state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, a game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game) is performed. Be executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and is located near the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down to the sorting prize winning device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured such that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when a result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (general-purpose lottery) executed based on a ball passing through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 becomes a hit. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and is configured such that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting winning device 700 is different.

  Note that the detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 40 of the above-described third embodiment, and will not be repeated. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the sorting prize winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on winning in a win (normal drawing) as a result of the general drawing lottery. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 44, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning per ordinary drawing. The switching valve 702 operates as described above, and is operated so as to communicate with the first flow path 703 during other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706. The dropped ball enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 122, the first operation port 704 and the second operation port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the first operating port 704 is connected to a first operating accessory 645 a provided below the right region of the game board 13 by a first operating mechanism 705, and has entered the first operating port 704. When the ball presses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first actor 645a is configured to come into contact with the actor 645a to open.

  Then, the first operating accessory 645a is opened by the operation of the first operating mechanism 705, so that the right first ball entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entry opening 64a2, the lottery of the special drawing 1 is executed as in the case of the first entry opening 64a1, and the entered ball is placed at the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first operating accessory 645a is closed.

  As described above, the mechanism that changes the accessory into the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-motorized accessory. Although a detailed description of the configuration of the non-motorized accessory is omitted in the present embodiment, any technique that has already been disclosed may be appropriately employed.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 in the same manner as the configuration of the non-motorized accessory described above. The second actor 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entrance 64b, which can enter when the second actor 645b is in the open state, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageously than the special figure 1 can be performed. Be executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first Since the configuration is the same as that of the non-motorized accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, a detailed description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is set only for a predetermined period of time when the above-described switching valve 702 is selected, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after election per ordinary drawing (2 seconds). The first channel 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during the other periods (including a period in which no winning is performed per ordinary drawing). The first channel 703 is opened by flowing down the second channel 706. The special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is performed by the ball entering the second actor 645b, which prevents the special figure 2 lottery from being executed by an illegal game. That's why.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description of the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b enters a state in which the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 can enter the ball, the game board 13 does not enter the sorting prize winning device 700 and does not enter. The ball that has flowed down the right side area is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the entrances in which the ball can enter.

  In this manner, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed (probable change state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

  First, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, three entrances are provided in which a lottery of a special symbol is executed when the ball enters. Specifically, a first entrance 64a1 provided on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, and a right second entrance provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view. 64b, and a right first ball entrance 64a2 provided on the right side in front view of the right second ball entrance 64b.

  In each of the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2, a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-described two types of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. It is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 123, a first operating accessory 645a is provided in the right first entrance 64a2. The first actor 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the right first entrance 64a2, and cannot enter the right first entrance 64a2 ( Difficult). The first operating character 645a switches to an open state when a ball enters a first operating port 704 provided inside the sorting prize winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first actor 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  Similarly, a second actuation accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. The second actor 645b also has an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) the right second ball entry port 64b, and a ball cannot enter the right second ball entry port 64b ( Difficult). The second actor 645b attached to the second actor 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second actuation port 707 provided inside the sorting prize device 700. On the other hand, the second actor 645b switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters.

  A sorting prize device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. The sorting winning device 700 is a device for sorting (entering) a ball that has entered the interior to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (enters the ball), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first input port 64a2 switches to the open state, and the right first input ball The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (enters the ball), the second operating role 645b attached to the right second input port is switched to the open state, and the ball is moved to the right second input port 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

  Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a front view of the distribution winning device 700. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 701 on the upper right side. The electric accessory 701 protrudes from the variable display device unit 80 to the right channel when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display device unit 80, and is buried in the left wall surface of the channel without projecting into the channel. It is configured to be switchable to the buried position. When the electric accessory 701 is at the protruding position, only one ball that has flowed down the flow path can be received and held on the upper portion thereof. Further, when the electric accessory 701 switches from the protruding position to the buried position, the ball held at the upper part can flow into the sorting and winning device 700 through the opening 701a.

  The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 and the opening 701a is branched into two flow paths of a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. The first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are provided with detection sensors 703a and 706a for detecting passage of a sphere, respectively. Further, since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707. At a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the inside of the sorting prize device 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is set to a switching valve ( A variable flow path 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706 (sliding displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and only the first flow path is opened. Proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, the second switching state is a state in which the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right in front view to close the upstream side of the first flow path and open only the first flow path. , The sphere proceeds to the second flow path.

  If the ball can enter the sorting prize device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down to the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second entrance port 64b. That is, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of giving the special symbol probable change state in the case of the big hit, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the flowing direction (whether flowing down the first flow path 703 or flowing down the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124, a first operation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operation port 704. The first operating port 704 is formed of a known non-motorized accessory, that is, switches the first operating accessory 645a to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first operating port 704. Can be. In addition, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entrance opening 64a2.

  On the other hand, a second operation mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operation port 707. The second operation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operation mechanism 705. In other words, the second actor 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second actuation port 707. When the second actor 645b is in the open state, the second actor 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entrance 64b.

  As described above, by causing the ball to enter the sorting prize winning device 700, the ball is allowed to enter the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating agent 645a or the The second actor 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the special symbol 2 lottery wins, it becomes more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. Can be noticed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 125 is a view showing the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as compared to the first embodiment, the configuration of the sorting prize winning device 1640 is changed, the right first entrance 64a2 is provided, and the right second entrance 64b. The difference is that the configuration for the ball to enter is changed. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 39, the gaming properties of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in a normal game state, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) is executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64a1, a jackpot game in which the second variable prize device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won is executed. In addition, depending on the type of the jackpot that has been won, the probability that the jackpot will be a jackpot by the special figure lottery after the end of the jackpot game will be a high probability, and further, a probability fluctuating game state (hereinafter referred to as a probable change state) in which the special figure lottery will be easily received Although the probability of a jackpot does not change, a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, a time-saving state) in which lottery of special figures is easily received is given.

  Here, the probable change state of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probable state 1 in which the drawing of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probable state, and a probable state 2 in which the drawing of FIG. Is provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be acquired by one jackpot game, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is easy to shift to a gaming state in which the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game is large, and it is easy to win the jackpot.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the probable change state 1 that is more probable than the regular game and the probable change state 2 that is more advantageous than the probable change state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probable change state is increased (it is easy to enter into the probable change state 1), and the player can easily experience the game state (probable change state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to experience the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the performance during the jackpot game or the probable change state, to make the game entertainable, and to reduce the rate of shifting to the probable change state 2. However, it is possible to provide the player who has shifted to the probable change state 2 with a sense of superiority, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game for the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 is also configured to be able to set the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the time saving state in the same manner as the above-described probable change state, and both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 Game state where special figure lottery is easy to be performed (balls easily enter the entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time reduction state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed substantially, and the time reduction state 2 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  A detailed description will be given later of a configuration in which the probable change state 1 and the probable change state 2 are set as the probable change state, and the time reduction states 1 and 2 are set as the time reduction states.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. When the gaming state shifts to the probability change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, a game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game) is performed. Be executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and is located near the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down to the sorting prize winning device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured such that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when a result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (general-purpose lottery) executed based on a ball passing through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 becomes a hit. The electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and is configured such that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting winning device 700 is different.

  The detailed description is the same as that of FIG. 61 of the above-described third embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. However, the configuration inside the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the sorting prize winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 falls onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on winning in a win (normal drawing) as a result of the general drawing lottery. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow. Note that as described above with reference to FIG. 65, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning per ordinary drawing. The switching valve 702 operates as described above, and is operated so as to communicate with the first flow path 703 during other periods.

  A first working port 704 is provided at the most downstream position of the first flow path 703, while a second working port 707 is provided at the most downstream position of the second flow path 706. The dropped ball enters one of the working ports. Here, returning to FIG. 125, the first operation port 704 and the second operation port 707 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the first operating port 704 is connected to a first operating accessory 645 a provided below the right area of the game board 13 by a first operating mechanism 705, and has entered the first operating port 704. When the ball presses the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 (not shown), the second contact piece provided on the other end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up and the first contact piece is pushed up. The first actor 645a is configured to come into contact with the actor 645a to open.

  Then, the first operating accessory 645a is opened by the operation of the first operating mechanism 705, so that the right first ball entrance 64a2 can enter the ball. When a ball enters the right first entry opening 64a2, the lottery of the special drawing 1 is executed as in the case of the first entry opening 64a1, and the entered ball is placed at the other end of the first operating mechanism 705. By depressing the provided second contact piece, the first contact piece provided on one end side of the first operating mechanism 705 is pushed up, and the first operating accessory 645a is closed.

  As described above, the mechanism that changes the accessory into the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-motorized accessory. Although a detailed description of the configuration of the non-motorized accessory is omitted in the present embodiment, any technique that has already been disclosed may be appropriately employed.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 in the same manner as the configuration of the non-motorized accessory described above. The second actor 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entrance 64b, which can enter when the second actor 645b is in the open state, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageously than the special figure 1 can be performed. Be executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first Since the configuration is the same as that of the non-motorized accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, a detailed description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is set only for a predetermined period of time when the above-described switching valve 702 is selected, that is, for 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after election per ordinary drawing (2 seconds). The first channel 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during the other periods (including a period in which no winning is performed per ordinary drawing). The first channel 703 is opened by flowing down the second channel 706. The special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is performed by the ball entering the second actor 645b, which prevents the special figure 2 lottery from being executed by an illegal game. That's why.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description of the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be continued. When the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b enters a state in which the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 can enter the ball, the game board 13 does not enter the sorting prize winning device 700 and does not enter. The ball that has flowed down the right side area is guided by a plurality of nails and enters one of the entrances in which the ball can enter.

  In this manner, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed (probable change state or time saving state), the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery or special figure 2 lottery) is more easily executed than in the normal game state. ing.

  Next, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 and the switching member 702 described above will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an opening pattern A and an opening pattern B as an opening pattern of the electric combination (electric combination) 710. The opening pattern of this electric role is configured to be set according to the type of jackpot won by the special drawing lottery. In the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 (when the RAM is cleared), the release pattern A is set.

  When the opening pattern A is set, it will be opened (opened) for 1 second, then closed (closed) for 1.4 seconds, and then opened again (0.1 second) after winning the regular drawing. The operation of the electric accessory 710 is controlled (the hit period is 2.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory is opened (opened) for 0.1 second, then closed (closed) for 1.4 seconds, and opened again (1 second). The operation of 710 is controlled (the winning period is 2.5 seconds).

  In this way, the electric accessory 710 is configured such that the contents of control to be opened and closed differ depending on the set opening pattern. In addition, the opening pattern in which the operation control content of the electric accessory 710 is set is determined by the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

  In the fourth embodiment, the winning period (2.5 seconds) in the winning game (per-figure game) executed according to the general figure and the opening period (total time) of the electric accessory 710 during the winning period And the number of times (two times) the electric accessory 710 is opened during the winning period is the same regardless of which of the opening patterns A and B is set. This is to reduce the processing load of the operation control process in the winning game, and it is expected that the player will enter the sorting prize winning device 1640 regardless of which ordinary drawing game is executed. This is because the degree is not changed.

  If the degree of expectation of a ball entering the sorting winning device 700 does not change, another operation control content may be used as control for operating the electric powered accessory 710. For example, the number of times the ball is released during the period during which it is difficult to enter the ball (0.1 second) may be increased, or the period during which the ball is in the closed state where it cannot enter the ball (difficult) may be changed.

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to unify the degree of expectation of the ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 in the opening pattern of all the motorized bonuses 710, and it is easy to hit the sorting winning prize device 700 and it is difficult to enter the ball. A winning game may be provided. In the fourth embodiment, the operation is controlled so that the electric accessory 710 is opened as soon as the winning of the universal drawing is won. However, this means that the winning game is immediately executed to execute the winning game. This is for notifying the player without delay. The operation may be controlled such that the electric accessory 710 is opened after a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the winning in the ordinary drawing.

  When such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a player is visually recognized as a third symbol display device 81 by using a display device that can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the ball will be won per ordinary map and the ball will enter the sorting prize winning device 700. In addition, a technique of notifying a lottery result (determination result) of a special symbol as to whether or not to be won per ordinary symbol (the identification symbol (identification information) when the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. May be notified to the player using a technique of notifying the lottery result (determination result) in accordance with the display mode of (1). As a result, the player can enjoy the variable display of both the special symbol and the normal symbol, which has the effect of preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. A switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first channel 703 or the second channel 706 is provided in the sorting prize winning device 700. The switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to a position where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds elapse after the winning per normal drawing. Regarding the operation control of the switching valve 702, a fixed operation is performed regardless of which open pattern is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 710.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a ball entering the distribution winning device 700 for each electric hand opening pattern. First, when the opening pattern A is set as the electric winning opening pattern, a period in which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second from the start of the game. The ball that entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds elapse as described above. At the timing when the ball arrives at the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the first flow path 1644 is in communication, and the ball is guided to the first flow path 1644. While the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 701 in this manner, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is guided to the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. As a result, the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64a2. In other words, when the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric winning (electrically driven accessory), the gaming state (the time saving state 1, the probability changing state 1) in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Will be set. In the opening pattern A, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 second after 1.5 seconds elapse after the jackpot win, but the opening for 0.1 second is an interval at which the ball is difficult to enter. And almost no ball enters. If a ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700 during this period, the ball enters the sorting winning prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern B described later.

  Next, when the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern, a period in which a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 is one second after 1.5 seconds elapse from the start of the game. . The ball that entered during this time reaches the switching valve 702 after 0.4 seconds elapse as described above. At the timing when the ball arrives at the switching valve 702, the switching valve is located in a state where the second flow path 706 is in communication, and the ball is guided to the second flow path 706. As described above, while the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is guided to the second flow path 706 and enters the second operating port 707. Acting on the ball, the ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b. In other words, when the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the electric winning (electrically driven accessory), the gaming state (the time saving state 2, the probability changing state 2) in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Will be set. In the opening pattern B, the electric accessory 701 is opened for 0.1 second after the jackpot is won. However, the opening for 0.1 second is a difficult interval for the ball to enter, and almost no ball enters. There is no ball. If a ball enters the distribution prize device 700 during this period, the ball will enter the distribution prize device 700 at the same timing as the opening pattern A described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled such that the ball that has entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball that has entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. This allows the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 to be guided to a desired flow path, and the ball is transferred from the sorting prize device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in a state where the fluctuation time of the general figure is shortened (a time saving state, a probable change state), the fluctuation time of the general figure is set to be 3 seconds. Therefore, in a state in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric winning opening pattern, the switching valve 702 is set from the start of the normal drawing in order to reliably guide the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 to the second flow path. Even if the second flow path is placed in a state where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after the elapse of 1.5 seconds, the first flow path is brought into a state where the first flow path is communicated until the game is executed again after the next general figure change. Since it can be positioned, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 across a plurality of times per game is guided to an unintended flow path.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric hand (electrically-operated character) is configured to be settable based on the jackpot type, and the set opening pattern of the electric hand (electrically-powered character) is set. The game state where the special figure 1 fluctuates substantially and the game state where the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially can be set based on the. Furthermore, a special advantage (a larger number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game, which is substantially special) is more advantageous when the jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery than when the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 lottery. (The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed is high).

  As a result, the time saving state and the probable change state are further changed to a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, probable changing state 2) and the player is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the normal game state. It is possible to provide a game state (a time saving state 1, a probability change state 1) which is a game state. Therefore, various game states can be set for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for transition from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, the player can easily see the effect performed in the time reduction state or the probability change state. Or by setting a low transition rate for shifting to the probable state 2 which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player so as to give the player who has shifted to the probable state 2 a sense of superiority. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, two types of open patterns A and B can be set as open patterns of the electric combination (electrically-operated accessory). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types may be set. Thereby, it is possible to set more various game states.

  In the fourth embodiment, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an opening for guiding a sphere to the second flow path 706 are provided as opening patterns of the electric role (motorized accessory). A pattern (opening pattern B) is set. For example, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened at a timing when a ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided. Is also good. This allows the player to enjoy which flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, and further enhances the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured to enter one of the operation ports (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). A flow path is provided from the sorting and winning device 700 to the game board 13 again, or an outlet communicating with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering each operation port. A channel for entering the mouth may be provided. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the ball in the sorting prize winning device 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined constant operation after the hit game is executed. For example, the constant operation is always performed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The configuration may be such that the number of the balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), thereby switching the communicating flow path.

  In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 is actuated by the switching valve 702 as a switching member being brought into contact with a ball, and is operated under a predetermined condition (for example, (Passing through 10 balls) may be configured to switch the communicating flow path.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the sphere guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 flows down the flow path and enters one of the working ports. A allocating member for allocating a sphere guided to any one of the flow paths by 702 to a plurality of flow paths is provided, and the sphere allocated to the specific flow path by the allocation member enters a corresponding working port. May be.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As means for varying (extending) the time for a ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702, a period until the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 is set. A plurality of different paths may be provided, and a distributing means may be provided for distributing a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to any one of the paths. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a player who can play a game while predicting a timing at which a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 from being tired of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the sorting prize device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided in the right area (hereinafter, right hit area) of the game board 13. It had been.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, a point that a left through gate 67a and a first ball entrance 64a1 are provided in a left area (hereinafter, referred to as a left hit area LE) of the game board 13; 13 is provided with a right through gate 67b and a second ball entrance 64b1 in the right hitting area RE, and the lower side of the game board 13 through which any of the game balls fired in the left hitting area LE and the right hitting area RE can pass. In the region (hereinafter, central region CE), a third distribution prize device 7000 is provided in place of the distribution prize device 700, a variable prize device 165 is provided in the central region CE, and a third distribution prize device. The difference lies in that a central first ball entrance 64a3 and a central second ball entrance 64b3 are provided in which a game ball entered in 7000 can enter, and the first variable winning device 65 is eliminated. The same components as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 126 is a view showing the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. Here, first, with reference to FIG. 126, the gaming properties of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different in a game aiming at the left hitting area LE (hereinafter, referred to as a left hitting game) and a game aiming at the right hitting area RE (hereinafter, referred to as a right hitting game). It has nature.

  Specifically, in the left hitting game, a game aiming at the first entrance 64a1 is executed, and the lottery of the special symbol 1 (special figure 1) is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 64a1. Be executed. When the jackpot is won as a result of the lottery in the special map 1, after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game states (for example, 50 times) in which game balls can easily enter the third distribution prize device 7000 (for example, 50 times). Or until the next jackpot).

  In this time reduction state, a time reduction state (time reduction state 1 and time reduction state 2) having different degrees of advantage for the player is set as in the above-described fourth embodiment, and a lottery is executed in a left-handed game. After winning the jackpot as a result of the drawing of Toku-zu, the time saving state 1 (the ball that has entered the third sorting prize device 7000, the entrance for executing the drawing of Toku-zu (the first entry) Only the time-saving state that flows down to the mouth 64a2) can be set.

  On the other hand, in the right hitting game, a game aiming at the second entrance 64b1 is executed, and a lottery of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second entrance 64b1. . If a specific jackpot is won as a result of the lottery of the special map 2, after the jackpot game is over, the game ball enters the third sorting prize device 7000 as a game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to enter the ball, and the time saving state 2 ( It is configured such that the ball that has entered the third sorting prize winning device 7000 is set to a time slot in which the ball flows down to the ball entry port (the second ball entry port 64b2) where the lottery of the special drawing 2 is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by arbitrarily selecting whether the player performs a left-hitting game or a right-hitting game, the player can select any of different gaming properties and execute the game. it can.

  By using such a configuration, for example, in a left-handed game, as a result of the lottery of the special figure 1 (big hit probability 1/100), if a big hit is won, a time-saving state (including 100%) in a time-saving state (time-saving state 1) ) (For example, with a probability of 30%, a transition to the time-saving state until the next big hit (time-saving state 1), and with a probability of 70%, until the special figure change is executed 50 times (the time-saving state 1). )), And it is possible to execute a game aiming at a further big hit (a game with low gambling) during the time-saving game (time-saving game 1).

  On the other hand, in the right-handed game, as a result of the lottery of the special figure 2 (the jackpot probability of 1/100 (same as the jackpot probability of the special figure 1)), when the jackpot is won, a predetermined probability (when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1) Shifts to the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) with a lower probability (for example, 30%) than the probability that the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) is given (for example, the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) until the next big hit) The game shifts to the provided time-saving state (time-saving state 2), and it is possible to execute a game aiming at a further big hit (a game with high gambling) during the time-saving state (time-saving state 2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a big hit during the time saving state 2, the probability (for example, 80) is higher than when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a big hit in the non-time saving state. %), The game shifts to the time-saving state (time-saving state 2), so that once the game shifts to the time-saving state 2, the game in which the jackpot and the time-saving state 2 are looped with high probability (high gambling) (Game).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can select and execute a game with low gambling and a game with high gambling by selecting a game to fire a game ball. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the player to move to different pachinko machines 10 in order to execute games having different gambling characteristics. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the amount of money invested in the game and the acquired payout, variations in the game can be increased.

  Here, the probable change state of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. As will be described later in detail, the probability change state of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the jackpot probability of the special figure hardly changes with respect to the normal state that is not the probability change state (for example, the jackpot probability of the normal state is For 1/100, the jackpot probability of the probable change state is 5/400). This is based on the case where the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the normal state is a big hit and the case where the lottery result of the special figure 2 in the right-handed game in the probable change state is a big hit. This is because the probability of transition to a state that is advantageous to the user is changed.

  Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. When a lottery result of a special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is a big hit, a variable prize device 165 is provided in the central area CE so that a game ball can enter in a big hit game to be executed. The game ball that has passed through the right hitting area RE and the left hitting area LE is configured to be able to enter the ball.

  This makes it possible to execute a jackpot game using the same variable prize device 165 in the case of a jackpot as a result of a right hit game and in the case of a jackpot as a result of a left hit game, It is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the machine 10.

  In this embodiment, the same variable winning device 165 is used for the right-hitting game and the left-hitting game. However, other configurations may be used. A prize device (right variable prize device) is provided in the right hitting area RE, and a variable prize device for left hitting game (left variable prize device) is provided in the left hit area LE, and a game ball enters each variable prize device. In this case, the number of game balls (the number of award balls) to be paid out may be made different. In this case, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the right variable prize device with respect to the left variable prize device may be set to be larger. Thereby, there is an effect that the level of gambling can be more clearly defined.

  Returning to FIG. 126, the description will be continued. In the central area CE, a third distribution winning prize is provided at a location where a ball that has passed through the variable prize device 165 without entering the variable prize device 165 can enter (lower side (downstream side) of the variable prize device 165). An apparatus 7000 is provided. Here, the configuration of the third distribution winning device 7000 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third distribution prize winning device 7000. FIG. 127 (a) shows a ball that has entered the third distribution prize winning device 7000. FIG. 127 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow when the ball enters the third sorting winning device 7000, and the ball when entering the central first ball entrance 64a3. FIG.

  The third sorting prize winning device 7000 is different from the second sorting winning prize device 700 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that the third sorting winning prize device 7000 has a central first ball entrance 64a3 and a central second ball entrance. The point that the ball 64b3 is provided, the ball enters the third sorting winning device 7000, and the ball flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704 or the central first ball entry port 64a3, and The difference is that a configuration is provided in which a ball flowing down the two flow paths 706 enters the second working port 707 or the central second ball entry port 64b3. Other configurations are the same as those of the second distribution prize apparatus 700 of the above-described fourth embodiment, and therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (a), a state in which the switching valve 702 is movable (that is, a time-saving state) so that the game ball that has entered the third sorting prize winning device 7000 can flow down the first flow path 703. In 1), when a game ball enters the third sorting prize winning device 7000, the ball first flows down the first flow path 703 and enters the first operating port 704. Then, when a game ball enters the first operating port 704, the first operating object 645a is opened as shown in FIG. 127 (b), and then the game ball entered the third distribution winning device 7000. Enters the central first entrance hole 64a3.

  As described above, whether the game ball that has entered the third sorting prize device 7000 flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 depends on the set time reduction state (time reduction state 1). The game ball that has entered the third sorting winning device 7000 during the same time saving state flows down the same flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706) because it is determined by the time saving state 2). Will be. Therefore, the ball that entered the third sorting winning device 7000 entered the operating port (the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707), and then entered the third sorting winning device 7000. The ball can alternately enter the entrance (the center first entrance 64a3 or the center second entrance 64b3).

  In the present embodiment, the center first ball entrance 64a3 and the center second ball entrance 64b3 are provided in the third sorting prize winning device 7000. However, other configurations may be used. If the ball can enter the central area CE through which the game ball flowing down the area LE or the right hitting area RE can pass regardless of the left hitting game or the right hitting game, the third distribution prize is provided. It may be provided outside the device 7000.

  Returning to FIG. 126, a description will be given of a ball flow of a game ball flowing down the game board 13 provided with each of the above-described components. First, when the left hitting game is executed and the game ball flows down the left hitting area LE, the ball passes through the left through gate 67a. The game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a is provided with the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, and the variable winning device 165 (by the nails Q1, Q2, and Q3 provided above the first winning opening 64a). Alternatively, the ball is sorted to a channel that easily enters the ball in any of the third sorting winning devices 7000).

  That is, for example, when the nail Q3 is adjusted to the left in order to lower the ball entry rate to the first entrance hole 64a, the ratio of the ball to the variable prize device 165 (or the third distribution prize device 7000) correspondingly. When the nail Q2 is adjusted rightward in order to lower the ball entry rate to the first ball entry port 64a, the proportion of ball entry to the general winning port 63 increases accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the nail adjustment that is disadvantageous to the player. Although the second ball entrance 64b and the nails Q4, Q5, and Q6 in the right hitting area RE are also configured in the same relationship, the description is omitted because the content is the same.

  Then, when the game ball that has passed through the left through gate 67a enters the first entrance 64a, the drawing of the special drawing 1 is executed, passes through the left through gate 67a, and is directed toward the variable winning device 165. The game ball that flows down enters the variable prize device 165 when the jackpot game is being played, and passes through the variable prize device 165 when it is not during the jackpot game, and flows down to the third distribution prize device 7000. When the electric accessory 701 closes the passing port 701a of the third sorting prize apparatus 7000, the ball does not enter the third sorting prize apparatus 7000 but enters the out port 71 and the game board. 13 is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the machine.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 701 has opened the passage 701a of the third sorting winning device 7000, the game ball enters the third sorting winning device 7000 and is made passable by the switching valve 702. Flow paths (the first flow path 703, the second flow path 706) and the working port (the first working port 704 or the second working port 707) or the entrance port (the first first entrance port 64a3 or the center). The ball enters the second entrance 64b3).

  In the present control example, the game ball that has entered the third sorting winning device 7000 has an operating port (the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707) or an input port (the central first input port 64a3 or the central input port 64a3). Although a configuration in which the ball enters one of the central second entrances 64b3) is used, other configurations may be used. For example, an out exit may be provided, and the ball is released to the game board 13 again. May be configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state (left-handed game or right-handed game) of the player is configured to be distinguishable (for example, the game state is determined by detecting a game ball entering each entrance). , A region where the player is playing a game (left hitting region LE or right hitting region RE).

  Specifically, the brightness of various left decorative LEDs provided in the left hitting area LE and various right decorative LEDs provided in the right hitting area RE is changed according to the game state (left hitting game or right hitting game). The configuration is such that the brightness of the LEDs provided in the game area where the game is currently being executed is increased. As a result, the player can be notified of the game state in an easily understandable manner.

  Note that a configuration other than the above-described configuration may be used. For example, the glass unit 16 that covers the game board 13 is formed of a half mirror, and only the area where the game is currently being played is transmitted (the player can visually recognize the game board 13). Control to transmit light).

  Further, in the present embodiment, an electric accessory 701 that allows or regulates the entry of game balls into the variable prize device 165 and the third distribution prize device 7000 is provided in the central area CE and is shared (left hit game and right Although the number of components constituting the pachinko machine 10 is reduced by making the pachinko machine 10 common, the variable winning device 165 and the electric accessory 701 are separately provided for the left hitting game and the right hitting game, respectively. Alternatively, the third distribution winning device 7000 may be provided separately for a left-hit game and a right-hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the central area CE is provided as an area in which both the game ball flowing down the left hitting area LE and the game ball flowing down the right hitting area RE are provided. The configuration may be such that the region LE and the right hitting region RE are completely separated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down to an unintended area.

  Further, the handle 51 is provided with an adjusting means (adjusting button or the like) for adjusting the firing force of the game ball. The player may be able to easily aim at a desired area (the left hit area LE or the right hit area RE).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 128, the pachinko machine 10 includes a normal state where the electric accessory 701 is hard to open (a game without electric support), a latent probability change state, and a time reduction state 1 (a time reduction state for special figure 1 fluctuation). Disadvantageous time saving)), and time saving state 2 (special figure 2 changing time saving state (advantageous time saving)) are configured to shift based on the jackpot type that has been won.

  First, a case where a left hit game is executed in the normal state will be described. In the left-handed game, a game in which the change (lottery) of Toku-zu 1 is executed is performed. When a big hit is won, 30% shifts to the probability change / time saving state 1 (until the next big hit), and 50% changes positively (to the next big hit) ). The state shifts to the time reduction state 1 (50 times), and 20% shifts to the normal / time reduction state 1 (50 times).

  Next, when the game shifts to the time-saving (game with electric support) state, the game state changes at the illustrated ratio, and when the time-saving state ends, the game shifts to the game without the electric support as illustrated.

  On the other hand, in the normal state, when the right-handed game is executed, a game in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed is performed. The shift is made, and 50% shifts to the probable change (until the next big hit) / no time reduction (that is, the latent change probability state), and 20% shifts to the normal state.

  Then, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state 2 (game with electric support), 80% shifts to the probability change / time saving state 2 (until the next big hit), and 20% shifts to the normal state. That is, the left-hitting game shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state (time-saving state 1) with a probability of 100%, whereas the right-hitting game changes from the normal state to the time-saving state (hour-saving state 2) only with a 30% probability. It is set not to migrate. In other words, a game in which the left-handed game is more likely to be given a time-saving game from the normal state can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving game (game with electric support), the left-handed game has a 30% probability of shifting to the game state in which the time-saving state is set until the next big hit, whereas the right-handed game has the time-saving state. Is set to be as high as 80% for the transition to the gaming state set until the next big hit. That is, once shifting to the time-saving state, the right-handed game can execute a game in which the time-saving state can be easily continued.

  As described above, when the player selects the game method (left hitting game, right hitting game), the player easily shifts from the normal state to the time saving state, and easily shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Perform a game (a left-handed game with low gambling), or execute a game (right-handed game with high gambling) that is difficult to shift from the normal state to the time saving state and difficult to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. be able to. Therefore, when the player executes a game with different gambling, there is an effect that the trouble of moving to a different pachinko machine 10 can be saved.

<Electrical Configuration of Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a first random number 2 table 202a is provided instead of the first random number table 202a, and a first random number selection table 202b is provided instead of the first type selection table 202b. The difference is that a hit type selection 2 table 202b is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202a, and FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number selection 2 table 202b.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), in this embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399, and when the special symbol has a low probability (in a normal state). There are four random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 3” are stored in the first random number table 202a as the judgment values for low probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability (in a normal state), the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/1 / 100 ".

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability (at the time of a probable change state), there are five random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 5” are stored in the first random number table 202a at the high probability. Is stored as a judgment value for use. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability (at the time of a probable change state), the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 5, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/1 / 80 ".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol jackpot probability in the normal state and the special symbol jackpot probability in the probable change state are set so as not to cause a large difference. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. For the special symbol jackpot probability in the normal state and the special symbol jackpot probability in the probable change state, set other values if the special symbol jackpot probability is set higher than in the normal state. For example, the total number of random numbers is 4,000, the total number of random hits in the normal state is 40 (the jackpot probability is 1/100), and the total number of random numbers in the probability change state is 41 ( (The jackpot probability may be about 1/98).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the first hit type selection 2 table 202b in this embodiment includes a special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3, a special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4, and a special figure 2 selection table. A selection two table for two (time saving) 202b5 is set.

  Here, the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection 2 table 202b3. In the pachinko machine 10, three types of jackpots from jackpot A to jackpot C are set as jackpot types selected when a jackpot is determined in the lottery (discrimination) of the special figure 1.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the value "0-29" of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit A, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit B. "30-79" is set, and for the big hit C, the value "80-99" of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

  Here, if the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, a probable change state is given until the next jackpot is won. The time-saving state (time-saving state 1) in which the open pattern A is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit is won. When the jackpot A is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of eight rounds is given as a jackpot game, a probable change state is given after the jackpot game is completed until the next jackpot is won, and an opening pattern A is given as an electric winning opening pattern. Is set until the special symbol is changed 50 times. When the jackpot B is executed, about 500 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of four rounds is given as the jackpot game, and the opening pattern A is set as the electric-operating opening pattern without giving a certain change state after the jackpot game ends. Time saving state (time saving state 1) is given until the special symbol is changed 50 times. When the jackpot C is executed, approximately 250 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130B, the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 will be described. FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4. The special figure 2 selection 2 table (normal) 202b4 is referred to in the normal state when a jackpot is determined by the lottery (discrimination) of the special figure 2, and the large jackpot type is selected from the large jackpot D as the selected jackpot type. Three types of jackpots up to the jackpot F are set.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (b), the value "0-29" of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit D, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for the big hit E. “30-79” is set, and for the big hit F, the value “80-99” of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

  Here, when the jackpot type is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is given as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, a probable change state is given until the next jackpot is won. The time-saving state (time-saving state 2) in which the open pattern B is set as the pattern is given until the next big hit is won. When the big hit D is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the big hit game.

  When the jackpot type E is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of eight rounds is given as a jackpot game, and a time-change state is not given after the end of the jackpot game, and a probability change state is given until the next jackpot is won. You. When the jackpot B is executed, about 500 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  When the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, four rounds of the jackpot game are given as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state and the probability change state are set so as not to be given. When the jackpot C is executed, approximately 250 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5. The special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5 is referred to when a big hit is made in the lottery (determination) of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. The difference is that a jackpot G is set in place of the jackpot E with respect to (normal) 202b4. The description of the same configuration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when the jackpot G is selected in the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving) 202b5, a jackpot game of 8 rounds is given as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the next jackpot is won. The time-saving state (time-saving state 2) in which the opening pattern B is set as the electric-power releasing pattern is applied until the next big hit is won. When the jackpot G is executed, about 1000 game balls are paid out during the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 selection 2 table (time saving state) 202b5, the time saving state (time saving state 2) is assigned at an 80% distribution rate, and the special figure 2 selection 2 table is reduced. In (normal) 202b4, it is set so that the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is given at a distribution rate of 30%. Accordingly, the probability that the time-saving state (time-saving state 2) is given by the jackpot of the special figure 2 in the normal state (ie, the initial hit) and the jackpot of the special figure 2 in the time-saving state (ie, the jackpot in the extended holiday) Can be made different.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a difference between the rate at which the gaming state shifts to a gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous to the player and the rate at which the gaming state (time saving state 2) that is advantageous to the player loops. Therefore, despite the fact that the game state has shifted to the game state (time saving state 2) which is advantageous to the player and the shift probability is set low, the game state immediately shifts to another game state (for example, the normal state). As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is dissatisfied.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment described above, in the case where the player executes the game by aiming at the left hitting area LE of the game board 13, the game is executed while aiming at the right hitting area RE of the game board 13. Is executed, different games (games with different gambling characteristics) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the act of the player having to move to a different pachinko machine 10 in order to execute a game having different gambling characteristics. Further, since the player can play the game while selecting the gambling property in accordance with the amount of money invested in the game and the acquired payout, variations in the game can be increased.

  In addition, the variable winning device 165 which is in an open state in which game balls can enter during a jackpot game executed when a special symbol jackpot is won in a left hitting game or a right hitting game is set in the left hitting area LE or right hitting. Since all the game balls flowing down the area RE are provided in the central area CE that can flow down, the number of components constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the third sorting prize winning device 7000 is provided in the central area CE, the number of components constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, which of the central first ball entrance 64a3 and the central second ball entrance 64b3 the ball that has entered the third sorting prize winning device 7000 enters depends on the type of the time saving state being executed (the time saving state). 1 or the time saving state 2), and when executing a game in which the third sorting prize device 7000 throws a ball in the time saving state, the game can be executed in any of the left hitting game and the right hitting game. The same game result (the ball entry result of the game ball in the third distribution winning device 7000) can be obtained.

  Therefore, for example, when a right-handed game results in a time-saving state (time-saving state 2), a left-handed game is performed rather than a right-handed game performed and the third sorting prize device 7000 causing the game ball to enter. When it is easier to play a game and cause the third distribution prize device 7000 to enter a game ball, the game method can be changed from a right-hit game to a left-hit game. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select a game method (left hitting game, right hitting game) suitable for the current game state (normal state, time saving state) and play the game, thereby increasing the motivation to play.

  The cause of the difference in ease of entering the third sorting prize device 7000 between the left hitting game and the right hitting game may be adjustment of a nail implanted in the game board 13. A guide nail that guides the game ball flowing through the left hitting area LE toward the third sorting winning prize device 7000 may be a right-handed hit by adjusting the nail so that the game ball can pass through the through gate 67a more easily than the right through gate 67b. It is conceivable to make a nail adjustment that makes it easier to guide the game ball than a guide nail that guides the game ball flowing down the area RE toward the third sorting prize device 7000.

  Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a front view of the game board 13 according to a modification of the eighth embodiment. In this modified example, a plurality of (two) passage openings through which game balls can enter the distribution device 7000 are provided with respect to the above-described eighth embodiment, and game balls enter each passage opening. Is provided by providing a variable electric accessory (a left electric accessory 701a, a right electric accessory 701b) at a permissible position for permitting and a restricting position for restricting, and is executed when the game ball passes through the left through gate 67a. Open control of the left electric accessory 701a is performed based on the normal symbol lottery (left normal symbol lottery), and based on the normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67b. The difference is that the right electric accessory 701b is controlled to be opened. Other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the left electric accessory 701a is provided in the left hitting area LE, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the left through gate 67a is shown. It is configured to be opened (allowed position) when a hit occurs. When the time saving state 1 is set, the left electric accessory 701a is controlled to be opened so that a game ball can easily enter.

  On the other hand, when the right electric feature 701b is provided in the right hitting area RE, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery (right ordinary symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67b is a hit. It is configured to be opened (permissible position). When the time saving state 2 is set, the right electric role 701b is controlled to be opened so that a game ball can easily enter.

  In this way, for the third sorting prize device 7000, the passage openings (left passage opening, right passage opening) through which game balls can enter are provided for the left hitting game and the right hitting game, respectively. By providing the left motor-driven accessory 701a for the mouth and the right motor-operated accessory 701b for the right passage opening, it is possible to reliably separate the right-hitting game and the left-hitting game even in the time saving state.

  Further, when the left motor-operated object 701a, which is controlled to be opened based on the ordinary symbol lottery (left ordinary symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the left through gate 67a, is set to the time-saving state 1, The right electric auditors product 701b is configured so that a game ball can easily enter, and is opened and controlled based on a normal symbol lottery (right normal symbol lottery) executed when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67b. When the time reduction state 2 is set, the opening is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the ball. Therefore, when the time reduction state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player is set, the electric accessory 701a is played. It is possible to suppress the ball from entering.

  Note that, in this modification, the same configuration as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is used in the third distribution winning device 7000, and the left electric auditory product 701a or the right electric auditory product 701b is opened (allowed). Although the game ball that has passed through each passage opening in the state where the game ball is in the state of being guided is guided to the switching valve 702, other configurations may be used.

  For example, the left electric accessory 701a is opened, the ball entering from the left passage flows down the first flow path 703, the right electric accessory 701b is opened, and the ball entering from the right passage becomes the second flow. It may be configured to flow down the road 706. Thereby, the left hit game and the right hit game can be surely separated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of a game not intended by the player.

  The configuration of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the eighth embodiment described above may be combined with the configuration of each control example and each embodiment described above.

<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution prize device 7000 is provided instead of the distribution prize device 700. Details of the distribution winning device 7000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a front view showing the configuration of the distribution prize winning device 7000 according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the distribution prize winning device 7000 includes a distribution prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 35) according to a modification of the first embodiment, and a distribution prize winning device 700 (see FIG. 81) according to the fourth embodiment. Are combined. The basic functions of the sorting prize winning device 7000 are the same as those of the sorting prize winning device 700. When the ball enters (is sorted) into the first operating port 7040 of the sorting winning prize device 7000, Then, the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 7070 provided inside the sorting winning award device 7000 (if the ball is entered), the second operating agent 645b attached to the right second ball opening is opened. And the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  When a ball enters the right second entrance opening 64b, it is possible to execute a lottery of a second special symbol having a high probability of being given a special symbol change state in the event of a big hit, so that the player This is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operating port (whether the ball enters the first operating port 7040 or the second operating port 7070) into which the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 133, an electric accessory 7010 is provided on the upper surface side of the sorting prize winning device 7000. This electric accessory 7010 is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) the inside of the distribution prize device 7000, similarly to the electric accessory 701 of the distribution prize device 700 in the modification of the first embodiment. (Immersion state) and a closed state (projection state) where the ball cannot enter (difficult). The electric accessory 7010 is set to an open state when a winning is achieved by a normal symbol lottery.

  A guiding flow path 7020 through which a ball can flow is provided inside the distribution winning device 7000, and a magnetic sensor 7020a for detecting passage of the ball is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 7020. A first rotating body 7090 is provided below the magnetic sensor 7020a. The first rotator 7090 is provided with four concave portions (rotational ball entrances 7090a to 7090d) around which the game ball can enter, similarly to the positive variable rotator 900 in the modification of the first embodiment. I have. Of these recesses, the rotating entrance 7090a is configured to be able to guide game balls to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the sorting prize device 7000 enters the rotating entrance 7090a, and the first rotating body rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, and the first operating port is provided on the back side of the rotating entrance 7090a. When the positional relationship of 7040 is reached, the game ball rolls from the rotating entrance 7090a toward the back side and enters the first operating port 7040. In this case, the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2 is switched to an open state, and a ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2.

  On the other hand, the rotating entrances 7090b to 7090d are provided with walls that prevent the ball from being guided to the rear side. Therefore, even if the first rotator 7090 rotates to the front side of the first operating port 7040, the game ball that has entered the rotary entrance ports 7090b to 7090d is obstructed by the wall portion and is prevented from rotating by the first operating port 7040. Can not enter the ball. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the rotating entrances 7090b to 7090d is guided to the guiding flow path 7060 that continues to the second rotating body 7091.

  The guide passage 7060 is provided with a magnetic sensor 7060a for detecting a passing game ball, and the game ball detected by the magnetic sensor 7060a flows down to the second rotating body 7091. Similarly to the first rotator 7090, the second rotator 7091 is provided with four concave portions (rotation entrances 7091a to 7091d) into which game balls can enter, and only the rotation entrance 7091a has a game ball. To the rear side. Therefore, when the game ball enters the rotating entrance 7091a, the second rotating body rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the second operating port 7070 is arranged on the front side of the rotating entrance 7091a. In this case, the game ball rolls toward the rear side and enters the second operating port 7070. In this case, the second actor 645b attached to the right second entrance 64b is switched to the open state, and a ball can enter the right second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the rotation entrances 7091b to 7091d, the game ball is not guided to the second operating port 7070, and is guided to the discharge flow path 656, and the game machine is discharged from the discharge port 657. It is discharged outside.

  The first rotator 7090 and the second rotator 7091 always rotate at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is cut off. More specifically, the first rotator 7090 rotates clockwise in front view at a rotation speed of one rotation in five seconds, and the second rotator 7091 rotates counterclockwise in front rotation at a rotation speed of one rotation in three seconds. , Respectively. As a result, the game ball hits the normal symbol, and the game ball enters the first operating port 7040 in accordance with the timing at which the electric accessory 7010 is opened and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000. Whether to ball (enter the rotating entrance 7090a), enter the second operating port 7070 (enter the rotating entrance 7091a), or enter the exit 657 change. This allows the player to observe the arrangement of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091) more interestingly when the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 7000. it can. In other words, when the game ball reaches the first rotating body 7090, the game ball flows down to the second rotating body 7091 without being guided to the first operating port 7040 (the game ball rotates through the rotating ball inlet 7090b-). 7090d). In addition, when the game ball reaches the second rotating body 7091, it is expected that the game ball is guided to the second operating port 7070 (the game ball enters the rotary entrance 7091a). Can be.

  As described above, in this modification, the game ball is transferred to any one of the first operation port 7040, the second operation port 7070, and the discharge port 657 by the sorting prize winning device 7000 which easily enters the ball in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. It is configured to be distributed. The operating port (or discharge port) to which the game ball is distributed changes according to the rotation position of the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091. Therefore, it is possible for the player to observe the timing when the game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 7000 and the arrangement of the respective rotating bodies (the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091) with interest. Then, when the game ball is distributed to the second operation port 7070, the player can be pleased.

  In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, in the first rotating body 7090 and the second rotating body 7091, a rotating entrance (a rotating entrance 7090a, a rotating entrance 7090a, Although only one rotating entrance 7091a) is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to any number. For example, if the number of recesses for guiding game balls to the rear side in the first rotating body 7090 is increased (for example, if the number of rotating entrances 7090a and 7090b is increased), the first working port in the time saving state The probability that the game ball enters the 7040 (the probability that the first actor 645a associated with the right first entrance 64a2 switches to the open state) can be increased. It is possible to execute lottery of the first special symbol to which the probable change state is hardly given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole due to the probability change state being too continuous. Further, for example, if the number of concave portions for guiding the game ball to the back side in the first rotating body 7091 is increased (for example, if the number of rotating entrances 7091a to 7091c is increased to three), the second in the time saving state Since the probability that the game ball enters the operating port 7070 (the probability that the second operating agent 645b attached to the right second input port 64b switches to the open state) can be increased, the jackpot has been hit in the time-saving state. In this case, the lottery of the second special symbol to which the probable change state is likely to be given can be executed many times. Therefore, the probability of the probability change state being given after the end of the jackpot can be increased, and the expectation for the probability change state can be further increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the first rotator 7090 and the second rotator 7091 are configured to rotate at a constant speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be employed in which the rotation speed is randomly varied. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize at which timing the ball should enter the distribution prize device 7000 in order for the game ball to enter the second operating port 7070. it can. Thus, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 7000, the whereabouts of the game ball can be watched more interestingly. Further, the rotation speed may not be varied randomly but may be varied regularly. Specifically, for example, the rotation speed of the first rotating body 7090 is increased within a range in which a game ball that has entered the sorting winning device 7000 can enter the rotating entrance 7090a, and the rotating entrance 7090a The rotation speed of the first rotator 7090 may be reduced in a range where the ball cannot enter (the ball can enter the rotation entrances 7090b to 7090d). With this configuration, it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the rotating entrance 7090a, and it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the first operation port 7040. A game ball can be easily entered. In addition, for example, the rotation speed of the second rotating body 7091 is reduced at a rotation position within a range where the game ball flowing down the guidance flow path 7060 can enter the rotation entrance 7091a, and enters the rotation entrance 7091a. The rotational speed of the second rotating body 7091 may be increased at a rotational position in a range where the ball cannot be balled (balls can be entered into the rotating ball entrances 7091b to 7091d). With this configuration, the game ball can easily enter the rotating entrance 7091a, so that the second actor 645b attached to the right second entrance 64b can be easily opened. Therefore, a game ball can easily enter the right second entry opening 64b, so that an advantageous second special symbol lottery can be easily executed. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the time saving state can be further increased.

  In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball that has entered the rotating entrances 7091b to 7091d of the second rotating body 7091 is guided to the exit 657, but is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, an operating port having the same function as the first operating port 7040 (operating the first operating accessory 645a in an open state when a game ball enters) may be provided. With such a configuration, when a game ball enters the distribution prize winning device 7000, either the first operating role 645a or the second operating role 645b can be operated in an open state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probable change state or the time saving state.

  In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the first rotary member 7090 and the second rotary member 7091 are provided with four concave portions into which a ball can enter, but the number of concave portions is four. The number is not limited to the number and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the proportion of the concave portion capable of guiding the game ball to the back side of each rotating body may be arbitrarily determined. With this configuration, the probability (ratio) of the game ball being guided to the first operating port 7040 and the second operating port 7070 can be set more finely, so that the probability that the game ball can be reliably changed in the probability change state or the time saving state can be set. The ratio of entering the state can be set more freely (finely).

  In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the internal structure of the distribution prize winning device 7000 is the same as that of the distribution prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 35) in the modification of the first embodiment. It is not limited to. For example, the distribution winning device 650 (see FIG. 3) in the first embodiment may be employed.

  In addition, the distribution prize winning device 7000 in this modification may be applied to the distribution prize winning device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board configuration shown in FIGS. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The second modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a distribution prize device 8000 is provided instead of the distribution prize device 700. As shown in FIG. 134, the distribution prize winning device 8000 includes a distribution prize winning device 64c according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 40A and 40B) and a distribution prize winning device 700 according to the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 81). The basic function of the sorting prize winning device 8000 is the same as that of the sorting prize winning device 700 (see FIG. 81), and the ball enters the first operating port 8040 of the sorting prize winning device 8000 (sorting). In this case, the first actor 645a attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 8070 provided inside the sorting winning device 8000 (if the ball is entered), the second operating agent 645b attached to the right second ball opening is opened. And the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  When a ball enters the right second entrance opening 64b, it is possible to execute a lottery of a second special symbol having a high probability of being given a special symbol change state in the event of a big hit, so that the player This is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operating port (whether the ball enters the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) into which the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 enters. it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 134, on the upper surface of the distribution prize winning device 8000, an electric accessory 8010 having the same configuration as the electric accessory 701 of the distribution prize winning device 700 in the fourth embodiment is provided. The electric accessory 8010 has an open state (immersion state) in which the ball can enter (easily) and a closed state (projection) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult), similarly to the electric accessory 701 described above. State). The electric accessory 8010 is set to an open state when a win is made by a normal symbol lottery.

  A game ball that has entered the inside of the distribution winning device 8000 from the electric accessory 8010 flows down the guidance flow path 8020. The guide channel 8020 is provided with a magnetic sensor 8030a for detecting the passage of a game ball (the number of game balls entering the distribution prize device 8000). Adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are provided below the magnetic sensor 8030a. The game ball that has passed through the opening 8030c between the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b enters the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070 provided downstream thereof. As described above, when the ball has entered (distributed) the first operating port 8040, the first operating agent 645a attached to the right first input port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first input port 645a is switched to the open state. The ball enters the ball opening 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 8070 provided inside the sorting winning device 8000 (if the ball is entered), the second operating agent 645b attached to the right second ball opening is opened. And the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b.

  The adjustment nails 8030a and 8030b are configured such that the inclination can be adjusted by a clerk of a game store or the like, similarly to the adjustment nails t1 and t2 in the first embodiment. As the adjusting nail 8030a is adjusted to be inclined downward, the upper portion of the first operating port 8070 is blocked by the adjusting nail 8030b, so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to advance to the second operating port 8070. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball into the first operation port 8040. Conversely, as the game nail 8030b is adjusted to incline downward, the upper portion of the second operation port 8040 is blocked by the adjustment nail 8030b, so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to advance to the first operation port 8040. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first operation port 8070.

  As described above, in this modified example, the working port (the first working port 8040 or the second working port 8070) that makes it easier to enter the ball in the time saving state can be changed by adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b. . That is, when the ball is hit right in the time saving state (and the probable change state), it is determined whether the ball easily enters the first right entrance 64a2 or the second entrance 64b. Since the probability can be varied, the probability (ratio) that the probability change state is given in the event of a jackpot can be varied. More specifically, when the adjusting nail 8030b is tilted downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the first working port 8040, a right-handed shot is made in a probable change state, so that only the second special symbol lottery is executed. Configuration. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probable change state can be set to 80%. On the other hand, by tilting the adjusting nail 8030a downward so as to prevent the ball from entering the second operating port 8070, a right-handed operation in a probable change state is performed so that only the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the continuation rate of the probable change state can be set to 50%. As described above, in the present modification, the adjustable nails 8030a and 8030b are configured to be adjustable, so that the positive change intrusion rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed in accordance with the business policy of the game store.

  When adjusting the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, entry of a ball into one operating port (the first operating port 8040 or the second operating port 8070) is completely prevented, and game balls enter only the other operating port. Instead of being configured to allow balls, it is also possible to make adjustments so that game balls can enter both operation ports, and the entry ratios are different.

  For example, as the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are inclined rightward in a front view, the proportion of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 8000 entering the first operating port 8040 can be increased. On the other hand, the more the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b are inclined leftward when viewed from the front, the higher the proportion of game balls that have entered the sorting prize device 8000 entering the second operating port 8070 can be increased. Therefore, by changing the adjusting condition of the adjusting nails 8030a and 8030b, it is possible to provide an individual whose probable change state is easy to continue (a game ball easily enters the second operating port 8070) or an individual whose probable change state is hard to continue. Can be. Therefore, the player can be made to more seriously select a platform, and the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the platform before playing the game.

  In the distribution prize winning device 8000 of the present modification, the switching valve 702 is deleted, so that the type of the time saving state cannot be switched during the game, but the configuration can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, since the time-saving identification flag 203cs can be deleted, the process of switching the opening pattern of the electric accessory 8010 with reference to the time-saving identification flag 203cs in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol, or the value of the time-saving identification flag 203cs at the end of the big hit The processing and the like set according to the jackpot type can be deleted. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced.

  In addition, the distribution prize winning device 8000 in this modification may be applied to the distribution prize winning device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 having the board configuration shown in FIGS. 126 to 133. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  It should be noted that a pachinko machine combining some or all of the above-described embodiments may be used.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (switch between V sure lottery route and continuous lottery route in attacker)
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a winning port provided with a first privilege which is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball, and a game ball entering the winning port. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; A variable control means for changing the state from the state to the first state, a first ball entry area which is disposed inside the winning port and in which a game ball entering the winning port can enter, A second privilege different from the first privilege is given based on a second ball entry region different from the first ball entry region and a game ball having entered the first ball entry region, 2 Based on the game ball having entered the ball entry area, the first privilege and the second privilege A first entry state in which the first entry state becomes possible to enter the first entry area and a second entry ball at a timing at which the variable means is changed by the variable control means; A gaming machine A1 having switching means for switching between a second ball entry state in which a ball can be entered into a region.

  Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, the game ball is passed through a plurality of predetermined regions provided on the game board, so that the lottery of the type of the jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed is performed. There is known a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is started according to the type of the selected jackpot game. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passes the game ball. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the type of a jackpot game is randomly selected (for example, JP 2013-233181 A). In this case, the interest of the player can be increased until the jackpot game, which is a privilege game, is given, but the game becomes monotonous after the jackpot game is given, and the player gets tired early. was there.

  According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to provide the second privilege or the third privilege in addition to the first privilege at the timing when the variable means is changed by the variable control means when a specific lottery result is obtained. Therefore, even after a specific lottery result, it is possible to be interested in the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball entry area and a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the second ball entry area are provided in the winning opening. A switching member that has a switching member that can be changed between a first distribution state in which game balls entering the winning opening are distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path; A gaming machine A2 comprising at least variable control means for changing the distribution member to one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the flow path to be distributed varies depending on the state of the distribution member, so that after the specific lottery result, the pleasure of predicting the state of the distribution member is provided. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first rotating body disposed in the winning opening and having a plurality of entering regions around which game balls including the first entering region can enter, and disposed in the winning opening. A second rotator having a plurality of ball entry areas around which game balls including the second ball entry area can enter, and the second rotator at least during a period in which game balls can enter the prize hole. A gaming machine A3 having a rotation control means for rotating one rotating body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 and A2, the first ball entry area of the first rotating body rotating in the predetermined direction and the second ball of the second rotating body rotating in the predetermined direction are provided. It can be noticed whether the ball enters any one of the ball entry areas. Thereby, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a specific winning port configured to allow a game ball different from the winning port to enter, a state of entering a gaming ball in the specific winning port, and the entering state. Specific variable means that can be changed to a restricted state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than a state, and the variable control means, when it is determined that the specific lottery result by the lottery means, the variable A gaming machine A4 for selecting one of the means and the specific variable means to variably control the second state to the first state or the restricted state to the ball-in state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a winning opening to which the second privilege or the third privilege is given is changed by the variable means, or a specific winning opening which is not so is changed. Either one of which is changed by the specific changing means is selected. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the winning opening and the special winning opening is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group>
Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a winning port provided with a first privilege which is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball, and a game ball entering the winning port. A variable means for changing between a possible first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the variable means is changed to the second state. And a variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A first ball entry area, a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, and a second privilege different from the first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry area. First deciding means for deciding whether or not to give a game ball; Second determining means for determining whether to grant a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the first benefit and the second benefit; When the game ball enters the first ball entry area and is not given the second privilege by the first determination means, the game ball entered is placed in the second ball entry area. A gaming machine B1 having a guide path for guiding to a game machine.

  Here, for example, after a predetermined display mode appears, the game ball is passed through a plurality of predetermined regions provided on the game board, so that the lottery of the type of the jackpot game based on the predetermined region through which the game ball has passed is performed. There is known a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is started according to the type of the selected jackpot game. The lottery ratio of the type of jackpot game is different for each of a plurality of predetermined areas, and the player selects one of the plurality of predetermined areas and passes the game ball. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the type of a jackpot game is randomly selected (for example, JP 2013-233181 A). In this case, the interest of the player can be increased until the jackpot game, which is a privilege game, is given, but the game becomes monotonous after the jackpot game is given, and the player gets tired early. was there.

  According to the gaming machine B1, even when the ball enters the first ball entry area and the second privilege is not given, the game ball is guided to the second ball entry area to provide the third privilege. An opportunity can be given to the player as to whether or not to be determined. Thereby, even during the game in which the first privilege is given to the player, it is possible to perform an effect as to whether the second privilege or the third privilege is further given to the player. Therefore, various effects can be given to the player, and there is an effect that a trouble of getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, disposed in the winning opening, a first rotating body having a plurality of entering regions around which a game ball including the first entering region can enter, and disposed in the winning opening, A second rotating body having a plurality of ball entry areas around which game balls including the second ball entry area can enter, and the first rotation at least during a period in which game balls can enter the winning opening; A gaming machine B2 having a rotation control means for rotating a body and the second rotating body in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, the first ball entry area of the first rotator rotating in the predetermined direction and the second ball entry area of the second rotator rotating in the predetermined direction are provided. It can be noticed whether you enter the ball. Thereby, the player pays attention to the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific winning opening in which a game ball different from the winning opening is configured to be able to enter, a entering state in which gaming balls can enter the specific winning opening, and a state in which the entering state is higher than the entering state. A specific variable means that can be changed to a restricted state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and the variable control means, when it is determined that the specific lottery result by the lottery means, the variable means or the The gaming machine B3, wherein one of the specific variable means is selected and variably controlled from the second state to the first state or from the restricted state to the entering state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the prize port to which the second privilege or the third privilege is given is variable by the variable means, or the specific prize port which is not so is changed to the specific variable means. Is selected by either of the following. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the winning opening and the special winning opening is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

<Characteristic C group> (Selectable pachinko)
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first region into which a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second region different from the first region, and the first region A first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on that a game ball has entered the first area, and a first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on that the game ball has entered the second area. A second assigning means capable of assigning a second game value different from a game value, and a ratio at which game balls passing through the passage opening enter the first region and the second region, respectively. A gaming machine C1 comprising: adjusting means capable of adjusting the game machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of entrances into which game balls can enter are arranged, and when a game ball enters the entrance, the entrance to the entrance is determined in advance. A gaming machine configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to a player is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269071). In this case, the game store cannot set the number of prize balls, etc., and must purchase a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, etc. are set in advance according to the business method of the game store. In the case of a change in the business method, for example, it was necessary to purchase a new game machine suitable for the business method.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the adjusting means can adjust the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the passage opening to each of the first area and the second area. Therefore, for example, if the adjustment unit adjusts the second region to increase the ball entry rate into the first region, the first game value can be easily set to a gaming machine, and the adjustment unit can be used. By adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area with respect to the first area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a lower cost as compared with installing a new gaming machine.

  The gaming machine C1 has payout means capable of paying out game balls to a player, and the first number of the game balls is set based on the game balls having entered the first area. The payout means is paid out as one of the first game values, and a second number of game balls different from the first number is paid out by the payout means based on game balls entering the second area. A game machine C2, which is paid out as one of the second game values.

  According to the gaming machine C2, different numbers of game balls are paid out to the player in the first area and the second area, so that the profit on the game store side can be easily adjusted by adjusting the ball entry rate by the adjusting means. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a lottery means for executing the same lottery based on the game balls having entered the first area and the second area, respectively, and when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means A gaming machine C3 comprising: a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the same lottery is performed in the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, different game values are provided, so even if the ball entry ratio is adjusted by the adjusting means, the privilege game is executed. It can be configured that the lottery of whether or not is performed equally. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed without changing the degree of expectation for the privilege game even if the provided game value is adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion which can be directly adjusted from outside the gaming machine, and the adjusting portion is adjusted by covering the adjusting portion from the front side. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a first state in which the adjustment unit is difficult to adjust and a second state in which the adjustment unit is more easily adjusted than the first state. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the illegal adjustment of the adjusting means can be suppressed by setting the cover body to the first state. is there.

  The gaming machine C5, wherein in the gaming machine C4, the cover body includes a visually-impossible means for making the adjustment unit difficult to visually recognize when the cover is changed to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the cover body being changed to the first state by means of the difficult to view, so that the adjusting section is provided to the player. There is an effect that a game can be played without minding that the game machine has the game machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adjustment unit is configured to be capable of adjusting a ball width into the first area and a ball width into the second area. Gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the ball entry rate can be adjusted by changing the ball entry width, so that the ball entry rate can be adjusted by an easy operation. is there.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C6, counting means for counting the number of game balls passing through the first area and the second area, and the first area in a predetermined period based on the count value by the counting means. Calculating means for calculating the ball entry rate for game balls passing through the passage opening for each of the second areas; and notifying means capable of notifying the calculation result by the calculating means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C7 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C6, the entry rate of the first area and the second area can be notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and thus the adjustment is adjusted by the adjusting means. This has the effect of being able to actually check the ball entry rate.

<Feature D group>
A passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first region into which a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, a second region different from the first region, and the first region A first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on that a game ball has entered the first area, and a first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on that the game ball has entered the second area. The second giving means capable of giving a second game value different from the game value and the ratio of game balls passing through the passage opening to the first region and the second region, respectively. A gaming machine D1 comprising: adjusting means capable of adjusting.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of game balls passing through the passage opening to the first area and the second area by the adjusting means. Therefore, for example, if the adjustment unit adjusts the second region to increase the ball entry rate into the first region, the first game value can be easily set to a gaming machine, and the adjustment unit can be used. By adjusting the ball entry rate to the second area with respect to the first area, it is possible to set the gaming machine to which the second game value is easily given. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a lower cost as compared with installing a new gaming machine.

  The gaming machine D1 has lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery means executes the lottery as the first game value and the second game value, and the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In this case, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that a lottery as the second game value is more likely to be given a benefit that is advantageous to a player than a lottery as the first game value.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, a lottery is executed as the first game value and the second game value, and the size of the privilege given according to the lottery result is different. There is an effect that gambling can be adjusted by the adjustment by.

  In the gaming machine D2, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means, followed by stop display with the identification information indicating the lottery result. Storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating a lottery result for the first game value are stored, and dynamic display of identification information indicating a lottery result for the second game value. A second storage unit in which a plurality of display modes are stored, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit from the first storage unit or the second storage unit A gaming machine D3 comprising: a mode determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the discrimination displayed on the display means in the case where the game ball enters the first area and the case where the game ball enters the second area. It is also possible to make the information dynamic display mode different, and it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game by adjusting the adjusting means.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, there is provided a probability setting means for setting the specific lottery result and the probability of being drawn by the lottery means, and the second game value is more set than the lottery as the first game value. In the gaming machine D4, when the lottery results in the specific lottery result, a higher probability of lottery is set by the probability setting means than usual.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the first region and the second region are set so that the ratio at which the lottery probability is set higher than the normal time is different from each other. By making adjustments in accordance with the store, there is an effect that the profit of the game store can be easily adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the adjusting means has an adjusting portion which can be directly adjusted from outside the gaming machine, and covers the adjusting portion from the front side to adjust the adjusting portion. A gaming machine having a cover body that can be changed between a first state in which the adjustment unit is difficult to adjust and a second state in which the adjustment unit is more easily adjusted than the first state. D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the illegal adjustment of the adjusting means can be suppressed by setting the cover body to the first state. is there.

  The gaming machine D6, wherein in the gaming machine D5, the cover body has a visually-impairing unit that makes it difficult to visually recognize the adjustment unit when the cover unit is changed to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, the state of the adjusting section becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the cover body being changed to the first state by the visually difficult means. There is an effect that a game can be played without minding that the game machine has the game machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the adjustment unit is configured to be capable of adjusting a ball width into the first area and a ball width into the second area. Gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the ball entry rate can be adjusted by changing the ball entry width, so that the entry rate can be adjusted by an easy operation. is there.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D7, counting means for counting the number of game balls passing through the first game area and the second game area, and the first game area based on the count value of the counting means. Calculating means for calculating a ball entry rate for a predetermined period for a game ball having passed through the passage opening with each of the second game areas, and a notifying means capable of notifying a calculation result by the calculating means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition; A gaming machine D8 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D7, it is possible to notify the ball entry rate of the first area and the second area when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This has the effect of being able to actually check the ball entry rate.

<Characteristic E group>
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the ball more than the open state, and the variable ball entry means for establishing the open condition A variable control means for changing the closed state from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means, First ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter based on the entry of game balls into the first channel; and game balls based on entry of game balls into the second channel. A second ball entry means that can enter a ball, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry means. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on that the game ball has entered, and the first determination unit determines a specific first determination result. A first privilege is granted when the second discrimination result is obtained, and a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is provided when the second discrimination means has a specific second discrimination result. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the privilege provided by the privilege providing means is made different between the specific first determination result and the specific second determination result, the player is provided with the first flow path and the second flow path. Has an effect that the degree of expectation of the game can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, a game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means has been distributed to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and has been distributed to the variable ball-in means. A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which game balls are readily distributed to the second flow path. A gaming machine E2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the distribution between the first flow path and the second flow path is changed according to the distribution state set by the distribution state setting means. In this case, the user can be interested in which of the distribution states is set, thereby improving the interest.

  In the gaming machine E2, the distribution state setting means may be configured to determine the first distribution state or the second distribution state based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Wherein the second distribution state is more easily set based on the result of the specific second determination than the result of the specific first determination. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, there is an effect that the player can expect the specific second determination result to be more interesting.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a second variable ball-entering means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game state that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. Setting means, wherein the privilege giving means changes the second variable ball entry means as the first privilege or the second privilege from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E4 wherein, when the second privilege is provided, the ball is more likely to enter the specific area than the first privilege.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the player can enjoy whether or not a game ball enters a specific area, thereby providing novel gaming ability. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting unit may determine the probability that the first determining unit determines the specific first determination result as a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the specific state may be determined by the second determining unit. A gaming machine E5 wherein the probability of being determined as the second determination result is set higher than usual.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the probability that the game state setting means determines the result of the specific second determination is set to be high. Since it is easy to determine the result, there is an effect that the game is changed and the player can be prevented from getting tired early.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming state setting means sets, as a gaming state advantageous to the player, a gaming state in which a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, by setting the gaming state in which the bonus game is executed by the gaming state setting means, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being rut.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first ball entry means is set to a state in which game balls can enter based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first flow path, and the first ball entry means Means for causing the first ball entry means to enter a state where it is difficult for the game balls to enter based on that a predetermined number of game balls have entered, and based on the game balls having entered the first flow path. The first ball entry means is set in a state in which game balls can enter, and based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first ball entry means, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. A gaming machine E7, comprising: means for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be stably entered into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and stable. There is an effect that a played game can be executed.

<Feature F group> (G type)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the ball more than the open state, and the variable ball entry means for establishing the open condition A variable control means for changing the closed state from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means, A distributing means capable of distributing a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path Based on the first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and based on that the game ball has entered the second flow path, a game ball can enter A second ball entry means, a first discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means A second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the result of the determination, and executing the first privilege game when the first discriminating means has a specific first discrimination result, wherein the second discriminating means specifies And a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second determination result is obtained.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine with further improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the bonus game advantageous to the player is executed when the specific second determination result is more than the specific first determination result, so that the second distribution state is set. It is possible to play the game with expectation, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the distribution state setting means sets the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A game machine F2 having ratio changing means for changing a set ratio set in the game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the first distribution state and the second distribution are determined according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set in any one of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified depending on the game state as well as the determination result.

  In the gaming machine F2, a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming state, and one of the gaming states is set to one based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A game machine F3 having selection setting means for selecting and setting the game state of the game machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, one game state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be raised not only in the discrimination result but also in the set game state, so that interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a second variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state. And a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball, and a privilege providing means that provides a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. And a gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a game for expecting whether or not to enter a specific area and to diversify the game.

  In the gaming machine F4, the privilege provided by the privilege providing means sets the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result can be changed, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved. .

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first determination is performed until the end condition is satisfied based on the specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine F6 comprising special state setting means for setting a determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result higher than usual.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player can be concerned about whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Characteristic G group> (variable in the number of working hours)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the ball more than the open state, and the variable ball entry means for establishing the open condition A variable control means for changing the closed state from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means, A distributing means capable of distributing a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path Based on the first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and based on that the game ball has entered the second flow path, a game ball can enter A second ball entry means, a first discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means A second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the result of the determination, and executing the first privilege game when the first discriminating means has a specific first discrimination result, wherein the second discriminating means specifies A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second determination result of the first bonus game is executed, and the first bonus game or the second bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. After the bonus game is over, an advantageous setting means for making it easier for the opening condition to be fulfilled until the termination condition is fulfilled, and making the termination condition different between the specific first determination result and the specific first determination result. And setting means for setting. Machine G1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the advantage or disadvantage of the player can be varied depending on the difference in the period until the end condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of times the first determination and the second determination have been executed has reached the number set by the setting means. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the end condition is set by the number of times the first determination and the second determination are performed, so that the specific first determination result or the specific second There is an effect that the probability of being determined as the determination result can be easily changed according to the termination condition.

  In the gaming machine G2, the setting unit is configured to variably set the set number of times according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, since the set number is variably set according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the gaming machine G3 is interested in the set game state. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the distribution state setting means sets the first distribution state to the first distribution state according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G4 having ratio varying means for varying a set ratio set to the second distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the ratio at which the first distribution state and the second distribution state are set varies between the first determination and the second determination. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which discrimination is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (Time saving is provided after rush with a mixer)
A first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path; a distribution means capable of distributing the game ball to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the first flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path; and a game ball enters the first flow path A first ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter based on the fact that the game ball has entered, and a second entry ball for allowing a game ball to enter based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path. Means, first discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball-in means, and based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. A second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating operation, and a player having a specific first discriminating result by the first discriminating means or a specific first discriminating result by the second discriminating means. A privilege game executing means for executing a special privilege game, and a right to execute the privilege game to a player when a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result is obtained by the second determination means. Special game execution means for executing a special game in which a game ball is allowed to enter a specific area to which a game ball can enter the special area to which the special game is applied. A gaming machine H1 comprising: setting means for setting one of the first distribution state and the second distribution state after a game is executed.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the bonus game is given via the special game, the game can be switched between the first distribution state and the second distribution state, so that the game can be diversified. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, an opening in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state can be moved. A gaming machine H2 comprising: a movable member; and movable means for moving the movable member from the second state to the first state based on the execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the special game is executed so that the game ball can enter the opening so that a special state can be given to the player. The effect is that the freshness can be given.

  The gaming machine H2, further comprising switching means for switching between a guiding state in which a game ball entering the opening is guided to the specific area and a non-guiding state in which the gaming ball is not guided to the specific area. Machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the state of entering a specific area can be switched, so that there is an effect that gambling can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to change between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter than the open state. A variable ball-in means allocated to one of the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, and the variable ball-in means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on establishment of an open condition. A gaming machine H4 comprising: variable control means for changing the state; and state setting means for setting a state in which the opening condition is easily satisfied until an end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H3, by setting a state in which the opening condition is easily satisfied, a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is determined depending on a period in which the end condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the probability of being the determination result is substantially varied, and the game can be variously performed.

  In the gaming machine H4, the termination condition is satisfied when the number of times the first determination and the second determination are performed reaches the number set by the state setting unit. Machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, the termination condition is satisfied when the number of times the first determination and the second determination are performed reaches the number set by the state setting unit. There is an effect that the number of times set by the state setting means can be of interest.

  In the gaming machine H5, when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed, the state setting unit sets the number of times set in advance by the setting unit as the end condition. A gaming machine H6 for setting a state in which the opening condition is easily satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H5, when the first distribution state is set after the privilege game is executed, the state setting means sets the number of times predetermined by the setting means. Is set so that the open condition is easily satisfied, which is an end condition.

<Characteristic I group> (Divided)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a first flow-down area in which the game ball can flow, and a second area in which the game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is difficult to flow and the game ball can flow down. The game ball is directed toward one of the first downflow area and the second area by varying the firing intensity of the firing means based on the operation of the player, and the sectioning means for partitioning the game area. A launch adjusting means capable of being fired by the launch means, a first entering means provided in the first falling area and capable of entering a game ball, and a gaming ball provided in the second falling area; A second ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a first discrimination means for performing a predetermined discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball provided to the second ball entry means. A second determining means for performing a predetermined determination based on the fact that the ball has entered, and the first determining means Setting either one of a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the determination as a specific first determination result and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state Possible first setting means and one of the first game state and the second game state can be determined based on a specific second determination result determined by the second determination means. The gaming machine I1, wherein the second setting means, and the first setting means and the second setting means are different in a ratio of setting the first gaming state.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the rate at which the first game state is set differs depending on which of the first downflow area and the second downflow area the game ball is caused to flow down. There is an effect that it is possible to enjoy and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I1, a third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, a first state in which a game ball can enter the third ball entry means, and a first state thereof A variable member that can be changed to a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball, and a predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state based on establishment of an opening condition for the variable member. A first guiding flow path which is advantageous to the player for the game ball which has entered the third ball input means, and a second guiding flow which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first guiding flow path. A distributing means for distributing to the one of the road and the first guided flow by the distributing means when the first gaming state is set more than when the second gaming state is set. And distribution control means for facilitating distribution of the game ball to the road. Game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, when the first gaming state is set, the gaming balls are easily distributed to the first guiding flow path by the distribution means. There is an effect that the game can be executed with the expectation of the player that the game state is set.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, means for setting a normal game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state in a normal game, and setting the first game state or the second game state Means for facilitating the establishment of the open condition based on the game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the opening condition is easily established by setting the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Can be varied.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where entry is difficult, and an open state where game balls can enter and entry difficult A second variable ball-in means capable of being changed to a closed state, and the first variable ball-in means being changed from the closed state to the open state based on a game ball having entered the first guiding flow path. A first variable means for changing the state to the closed state after a predetermined number of game balls have entered the first variable ball input means when the state is the open state; The second variable ball-in means is changed from the closed state to the open state based on that the ball has entered, and when the ball is in the open state, a predetermined number of game balls are in the second variable ball-in means. Second variable means for changing to the closed state after entering the ball, the first variable The first discriminating means performs the discrimination based on the game ball having entered the deformed ball means, and the second discriminating means based on the game ball having entered the second variable ball-in means. A gaming machine I4 characterized in that the determination is performed.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are allowed to stably enter the game ball to stably perform the first discrimination or the second discrimination. And thus, the player can be given more opportunities for determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result. A gaming machine I5 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the execution of the bonus game allows the player to determine that the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. There is an effect that can be expected.

  In the gaming machine H5, the award game execution means is configured to execute the award game performed based on the specific second determination result more than the award game performed based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine H6 that is more advantageously executed by a player.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, there is an effect that the specific second determination result can be more expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the first variable ball entry means is located at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second flow-down area. The second variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow-down area is more likely to enter than a game ball flowing down the first flow-down area. A gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the game ball is made to enter the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means without the player changing the operation. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, there is provided a rendering means capable of executing a predetermined rendering, and the first visual recognition state and the first visual recognition state in which each of the first downstream area and the second downstream area are easily visible. A visual recognition changing means that can be changed to a second visual recognition state that is more difficult to visually recognize, and one of the first downstream area and the second downstream area based on the selection operation of the player in the second visual recognition. A visual recognition variable control means for changing the state from the state to the first visual recognition state.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the first downflow area or the second downflow area can be visually recognized by the selection operation of the player, so that the downflow selected by the player There is an effect that the region can be easily recognized.

  The gaming machine I9 according to the gaming machine I8, wherein the selecting operation is based on a flow-down area in which the game ball has flowed down by the firing means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize which downflow area the gaming ball fired by the firing means has flowed down.

  The gaming machine I10, wherein the gaming machine I8 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the selection operation is to operate the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, there is an effect that the downflow area selected by the player can be easily recognized.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of entrances through which game balls can enter are arranged, and when a game ball enters the entrance, the entrance is predetermined with respect to the entrance. There is known a gaming machine configured to pay out a certain number of prize balls to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269071).
However, the gaming store cannot set the number of prize balls, etc., and must purchase a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls, the jackpot probability, etc., that match the business method of the gaming store are set in advance. In the case of a change in the business method, etc., it was necessary to purchase a new gaming machine that matches the business method. As a result, there is a problem that the cost is increased when it is necessary to change the game value that can be given to the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a passing port through which a game ball can pass, and a first area into which a game ball passing through the passing port can enter. A second area different from the first area, a first assigning means capable of assigning a first game value based on a game ball having entered the first area, and the second area A second assigning means capable of assigning a second game value different from the first game value based on that the game ball has entered the game ball, and the game ball passing through the passage opening is Adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of entering each of the first area and the second area.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and has a lottery means for executing a lottery, and the lottery by the lottery means as the first game value and the second game value. Is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a benefit is provided in which the lottery as the second game value is more advantageous to the player than the lottery as the first game value. It is easy to be done.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the display unit displays identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery unit, and the identification information displayed on the display unit is dynamically displayed. After performing, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying with the identification information indicating the lottery result, the first storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information indicating the lottery result for the first game value, A second storage unit storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating a lottery result for the second game value, and a first dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. Storage means or dynamic display mode determination means determined by the second storage means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 or 3, further comprising a probability setting means for setting the specific lottery result and a probability of being drawn by the lottery means, In the case where the lottery as the second game value is the specific lottery result, a lottery probability higher than a normal lottery is set by the probability setting means more easily than the lottery as the game value. .
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a passage opening through which a game ball can pass, a first region into which a game ball passing through the passage opening can enter, and a first region thereof A second area different from the first area, a first providing means capable of providing a first game value based on a game ball entering the first area, and a game ball in the second area. A second assigning means capable of assigning a second game value different from the first game value based on entering the game ball, and a game ball passing through the passage opening, Adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of entering the ball with each of the second regions. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a low cost.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a lottery means for executing a lottery is provided, a lottery by the lottery means is executed as the first game value and the second game value, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, The lottery as the second game value is more likely to give a benefit that is advantageous to the player than the lottery as the first game value. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a low cost.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be obtained. A display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means and then stopping and displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result. And a first storage unit in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of identification information indicating a lottery result for the first game value are stored, and a dynamic display mode of identification information indicating a lottery result for the second game value. A plurality of second storage means, and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means from the first storage means or the second storage means. And Therefore, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a low cost.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 or 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery means has probability setting means for setting the specific lottery result and probability of being drawn, and the lottery as the second game value is more than the lottery as the first game value, When the specific lottery result is obtained, a lottery probability higher than a normal lottery probability is easily set by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value can be changed at a low cost.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a left the first input Award opening (first region)
64 b right first inlet prize opening (second area)
64j connection part (projection part)
112a ball firing unit (firing means)
202e prize ball table (part of the first giving means and the second giving means)
216 payout motor (payout means)
t1, t2 adjusting nail (flow path forming member)

Claims (2)

A first region in which a game ball can enter, a second region arranged in parallel with the first region,
A first assigning unit capable of assigning a first game value based on a game ball having entered the first area;
A second assigning unit capable of assigning a second game value different from the first game value based on a game ball having entered the second area;
A protrusion formed between the first region and the second region,
A flow path forming member capable of forming a guide flow path by being arranged facing each other with a width that allows the game balls to pass, so that the game balls can flow down to the protrusions from above the protrusions;
A first wall formed in connection with the protruding portion for restricting a game ball from rolling out of the first region;
A second wall formed in connection with the protrusion for restricting a game ball from rolling out of the second region;
A payout means capable of paying out game balls to a player,
A first number of game balls are paid out by the payout means as the first game value based on the game balls having entered the first area,
A second number of game balls greater than the first number is paid out by the payout means as the second game value based on the game balls having entered the second area.
A first space between the flow path forming member disposed on the first region side and closest to the protruding portion, and the protruding portion, and a protruding portion disposed on the second region side. By adjusting the second distance between the closest channel forming member and the protruding portion, the ratio of game balls flowing down the guide channel to the first area and the ratio The ratio of entering the second region is configured to be variable, and the ratio of entering the first region is adjusted to be high, so that the ratio of entering the second region is reduced. It is configured such that the ratio of entering the first region is reduced by adjusting the ratio of entering the two regions to be high,
The position of the flow path forming member arranged on the first area side and closest to the protrusion, and the position of the flow path forming member arranged on the second area side and closest to the protrusion section state, and are not each player is concealment configured,
Based on the fact that the total of the number of game balls that have entered the first area and the number of game balls that have entered the second area has reached a predetermined number, the number of game balls that have reached the predetermined number The number of game balls that have entered the first area in between and the number of game balls that have entered the second area can be displayed, respectively.
The number of gaming balls which have entered the special first region, the Der Rukoto that the number of gaming balls which have entered the special second region is capable of setting so that it does not appear to the player A gaming machine characterized by:   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball to a game area.

Images